Home

31295005453542

1. Receive Type ERROR 131 MASS STORAGE IS D700 No Press END LINE Type CHAIN Autost Press END LINE Follow system prompts Ca 274 APPENDIX B SYSTEM HPIB ADDRESSES Device Address HP9895A Disk Drive Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer HP7470A Plotter HP9111A Graphics Tablet HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope HP3437A System Voltmeter 700 702 705 706 709 714 724 275 276 APPENDIX C SYSTEM FLOW CHARTS INDEX AULOSE conoscan isis eee weds 278 MATE cai osos a 291 POT a eee ee 299 pC Terre ee ee ee AN 319 NORMD ss 0 s es Sew Se HS RSS SSS Re ee ROR OS 328 Hip eee eee EN 330 NICO oi cies wip ass clas WE aoe 344 HP DAS ere er eee eee eee 355 TABLET sss k eS Reser AAA 361 o nk o e ere 277 278 Autost The HP85 Desktop Computer has limited memory space Therefore to develop an effective data acquisition system the software was divided into several smaller packages These packages are controlled and accessed by Autost The Autost program serves as the central program control for the system The program controls initialization of the system clock and calendar and functional program branching The Autost program allows the operator to select from the functions 1 data acquisition 2 data processing 3 data plotting Based upon the selections made by the opera
2. file V I or t set data point index an integer multiple of 256 Yes there another Enter voltage ee MUX channel Set MUX channel Set voltage range Trigger channel 353 Close buffer Assign buffer to No there an ili error auxiliary file Yes 65 612 Create auxiliary file Store auxiliary file Close butfer Notify user eos Wait 4500 Do you want to store another pair data storing MUX flag Notify user file name is too long Enter file name Is for auxiliary file file name No too long 354 Turn off error ire Is error No Notify user of 63 unusual error Notify user of duplicate name you want to Purge duplicate file from storage purge Notify user to enter new file name 355 HP DAS The HP DAS program controls the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM These instruments are used to make up to four 4 256 point measurements The operator selects the input channel s voltage range s sampling time and test period The program uses these quantities to acquire data After completion the program generates an alarm to notify the operator The program then stores the curves in pairs These pairs are selected by the operator Initialize registers Set default values Enter channels Enter channel
3. GOSUB 740 IF Q SINGLE THEN GOSUB 2340 88 HP Graph Tablet option Loop until choice Set HPIB timeout Trap disk errors Time date invalid Set default name Trap timeout error Normal or single shot Set values for disk Check for device Set values for 7612D Check for device Aux measurements 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 OFF ERROR IF Q SINGLE THEN CHAIN 7612D D700 CHAIN NORML D700 ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 840 IF A 700 THEN 790 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 ASSIGN 1 TO RETURN SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 OUTPUT 7 ID SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 ENTER 7 USING K BS RETURN DISP The A is OFF Turn DISP ON the A and press DISP CONTINUE RESET 7 PAUSE GOTO 610 IF ERRN 131 THEN 840 RETURN REM REM REM NICOLET SYSTEM REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ON ERROR GOSUB 1180 CLEAR BEEP A 700 A disk drive B 1 GOSUB 1050 A 714 AS Nicolet o scope B 2 GOSUB 1050 GOSUB 2340 OFF ERROR CHAIN NIC85 D700 ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 1130 89 Load single shot prog Load normal prog Set timeout branch Not disk drive Open dummy file Close dummy file 7612D Listener Get 7612D ID 7612D Talker Accept 7612D response Notify user of timeout and ask for corrective actions Reset HPIB Retry to find
4. UP AE E SUS DO AUD SUS AO MU MEN A MU ATA HP9895A HP85 Desktop Computer Flexible Disk Drive Figure 3 4 Very Fast Measurement Subsystem Hand Entry These offsets occur because a plot placed anywhere in the active platen has a non zero coordinate associated with it Also placing a plot so that its boundaries are exactly parallel to the coordinate axis of the graphics tablet is almost impossible Therefore the software was developed to correct for these errors After entering the curve s the operator notifies the computer to store the data The software also allows the operator to enter data pertinent to the experiment The inputs were designed to accept data related to a test device undergoing second breakdown testing However the device data could be used in other wayS At any rate these inputs are printed out on the thermal printer as a record of the experiment The computer requests 1 manufacturer 2 device type 3 mask type 4 device number 5 temperature 6 second breakdown type 7 forward base current 8 reverse base current and 9 additional comments This data acquisition process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 2 4 a sample experiment is performed with the human machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program TABLET including computer prompts and operator responses 24 For further details regarding this program refer t
5. Autost 305 Do you want this plot 103 Set single flag by itself No Enter title for x axis Wait 4500 Is title too Notify user title long is too long No Enter title for y axis Wait 4500 Is Notify user title title too is too long long Calculate of reads Do you Set flag for want a grid or a graph plotting a grid Calculate plotting position Notify user to load plotter Scan y values for 653 minimum and maximum 306 this a processed data file Scale y div so that curve fills 80 of plot Is Yes y div value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Assign to closest range with first two significant digits of 10 20 25 or 50 Assign proper string prefix Use x div from control register Is x div Yes value lt 1 Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Assign to closest range with first two significant digits of 10 20 25 or 50 30 Scale plot area Set character size Frame plot area Set plot area Assign proper string prefix 309 Is grid flag No s
6. Calculate time from To Assign proper to 2nd breakdown string prefix Round to 3 Is significant digits time from To to 2nd breakdown value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Is change in energy from To to 2nd breakdown value lt 1 2 Round to 3 significant digits Calculate change in Assign proper energy from To to 2nd breakdown string prefix Print time from To to 2nd breakdown 319 LY The I V program generates a plot for current vs voltage The data is read into the computer and plotted using values calculated by the computer The program scans the given curve values finds the minimum and maximum values and plots the curve to fill 80 of the plotting area The I Y program allows the operator to scale the size of the plot and to plot the curves on either a grid or an open graph Initialize registers Set defaults Notify user file Wait 4500 name is too long Is file name known Is 9 file name Enter file name too long Enter mass storage Assign buffer to Read of curves mass storage file Has file been No processed Read con
7. Q1 2 Q2 R1 GOTO 2410 Set values R 1 2 stop index for curve 1 Ql curve with end to be truncated curve 2 Q2 index for end of interpolation curve 1 2400 R 2 2 15 P 1 4 P 2 4 Ql 1 Q2 R2 Set values R 2 2 stop index for curve 2 Ql curve with end to be truncated curve 1 Q2 index for end of interpolation curve 2 2410 FOR I P Q1 4 TO 1 STEP 1 2420 READ 1 15 1 Q1 1 P 1 4 R1 Read time to truncate 2430 IF R1 lt Q2 THEN 2450 If time lt S stop exit 2440 NEXT I 200 2450 R Q1 2 15 I Q1 1 P 1 4 Stop index for curve Q1 2460 RETURN 2470 REM 2480 REM 2490 REM MASS STORAGE SUBROUTINE 2500 REM 1 ESTABLISH MEDIUM 2510 REM 2520 REM 2530 IF R TAPE THEN 2590 2540 IF R DISK01 THEN 2570 2550 MASS STORAGE IS D700 Set for disk 0 2560 GOTO 2600 2570 MASS STORAGE IS D701 Set for disk 1 2580 GOTO 2600 2590 MASS STORAGE IS T Set for tape 2600 RETURN 2610 REM 2620 REM 2630 REM READ SUBROUTINE 2640 REM 1 READ CURVES 2650 REM 2 SORTS FOR INTERPOLATION 2660 REM 3 CLOSES FILE 2670 REM 2680 REM 2690 S2 S1 255 Set end of read 2700 IF I Q AND K lt 3 THEN S2 R K 2 If last read and interpolation stop is set from truncation 2710 IF I Q AND K gt 2 THEN S2 15 5 K P 3 3 If last read and not interpolation stop set by new of pts 2720 FOR J S1 TO S2 2730 READ 1 3 Z J S1 1 Read magnitude for multiplication othe
8. Scale x div so that curve fills 80 of plot Assign proper String prefix Set plot area Frame plot area Set character size Scale plot area Is grid flag set Yes No Draw open graph 325 Label plot divisions 326 Is this the Yes last read Read 2048 x points Read 2048 y points Plot x vs y Read remaining x points Read remaining y points Is Label y axis this the last read Yes Reset character size Label x axis Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect Load and run Enter new file name Autost 328 NORML The Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer was developed as a single shot transient digitizer Therefore the NORML program was written to simulate a normal oscilloscope The NORML program continuously arms and triggers the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer to simulate a free running state To change settings on the digitizer the operator pauses the program makes the desired changes and continues the program Notify user to Load and run press a key Autost pressed AmA amp B Notify user to change settings Trigger A amp B Wait 90 330 7612D The 7612D program controls the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and if desired the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM The digitizer is used to make up to t
9. initialization process in VMAUX Otherwise the software will notify 40 the operator that Autost is being loaded and run MISSION CONTROL will now resume control 4 4 Fast Measurement Subsystem Tutorial When the operator chooses to use the intermediate measurement subsystem the program 7612D is loaded and run First the program displays the message Initializing then proceeds to set the default values for variables in the program and initializes the data registers The program then asks for the number of curves to be digitized How many curves will be digitized and stored 1 2 For this tutorial two 2 curves are chosen for digitizing Thus the entry is made 2 The program next asks if there will be a repetitive set of measurements This program was designed for measurements that will all be made with exactly the same instrument settings For this case only one set of measurements is taken Will this be a repetitive set of measurements at the same settings Y N N Since the fast measurement subsystem was designed to make auxiliary voltage measurements if desired the software asks Do you want to use the system voltmeter to make additional measurements Y N If the operator chooses to use the auxiliary system then the entry is made Y 41 which brings about the following exchange How many channels are to be monitored by voltmeter 4 max 2 Enter the channel number and the voltage range 1V 1 1V 2
10. 1 EVALUATE PRODUCT AND 2080 REM TIME INTEGRAL 2090 REM 2100 REM 2110 FOR J 1 TO P 3 4 2120 Y 3 Y J Z J Multiply curves 1 amp 2 2130 NEXT J 2140 I2 J 1 Set storage index 2150 RETURN 2160 X 1 A t Set offset constant 2170 FOR J 2 TO P 3 4 2180 X J 5 Z 3 Z J 1 Y J Y J 1 X J 1 Evaluate integral using trapezoidal approximation 2190 NEXT J 2200 A x J 1 I2 J 1 Set new offset and storage index 2210 RETURN 199 2220 REM 2230 REM 2240 REM SORT SUBROUTINE 2250 REM 1 IDENTIFY USEFUL DATA 2260 REM 2270 REM 2280 READ 1 16 R1 Read start time curve 1 2290 READ 1 16 P 1 4 R2 Read start time curve 2 2300 IF R1 gt R2 THEN R 1 1 16 Ql 2 Q2 R1 GOTO 2320 Set values R 1 1 start index for curve 1 Q1 curve with beginning to be truncated curve 2 Q2 index for beginning of interpolation curve 1 2310 R 2 1 16 P 1 4 Ql 1 Q2 R2 Set values R 2 1 start index for curve 2 Q1 curve with beginning to be truncated curve 1 Q2 index for beginning of interpolation curve 2 2320 FOR I 1 TO P Q1 4 2330 READ 1 15 1 Q1 1 P 1 4 R1 Read time to truncate 2340 IF R1 gt Q2 THEN 2360 If time 2 start exit 2350 NEXT I 2360 R Q1 1 15 1 Q1 1 P 1 4 t Start index for Q1 2370 READ 1 15 P 1 4 Rl Read last time curve 1 2380 READ 1 15 P 1 4 P 2 4 R2 Read last time curve 2 2390 IF R1 lt R2 THEN R 1 2 15 P 1 4
11. 8 4 2 Normal OperationS oo oooooooooro cono o 245 8 5 Program WIapuP oooooooooooconcoroorcnsnarooo 246 8 6 ReferenCe oo oooooooooooooonorocncocronronononooo 247 NICOLET DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPE CONTROL PACKAGE 248 o o A AE 248 10 11 219 TABLE OF CONTENTS cont 9 2 Main Program Setup SER AS Siw Gre tele eee Bot yas 248 9 3 Data Acquisition 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cc cc www eeu c ccs 249 9 4 Main Program Execution 0 ccc ccc cece cw cence 249 9 5 Data Storage SetuP oooooooooooooomorommro 250 9 6 True Unit Computati0N o o oooooooooooooooo oo 250 ds Jo Data SECA de oe 251 9 7 1 File Creation Error3 oo coooooooomoomoo o oo 251 9 7 2 Normal OperationS oooooonooooooonoo 252 9 8 Program WIAPDUD ii A BOAR ewe dees 253 Sid ROLCLONCC iii i doi dc 64S CSS RES es Shales sae aw a a i 253 SYSTEM MULTIPLEXER AND VOLTMETER CONTROL PACKAGE 254 LU GE HOVELVIOW SS A aed oa 254 10 2 Main Program SetuP ooooooooonoonooronnnnsasos 254 10 3 Data Acquisition ae IAEA ae EGR 255 10 4 Data Storage soi icc bs whee cano see el es eee re 256 10 4 1 File Creation Brrorss os cise dares os Ses dee ee 256 10 4 2 True Unit Computation lt 6 iic cobro daran 257 10 4 3 Normal OperatiodSd ies ociosas 257 LUGO REGELTONCE AAA A Sia bie 257 GRAPHICS TABLET CONTROL PACKAGE ooooooooooooooooooo 258 t11 FOVOTULOW ii A Di
12. A second time regime is defined as intermediate measurements These measurements involve data taken at intervals of milliseconds down to hundreds of nanoseconds This type of data acquisition is necessary for any characteristic with a risetime of 1 microsecond or greater One piece of work which needed this data acquisition was a study on the switching characteristics of thyristors A third time regime is defined as fast measurements These measurements involve data taken at intervals down to 5 nanoseconds This sampling time allows resolution of phenomena with risetimes on the 8 order of 50 nanoseconds This type of data acquisition was used in the study of second breakdown characteristics in semiconductors The final time regime is defined as very fast measurements These measurements involve data taken at intervals of less than 5 nanoseconds In the previous three 3 time regimes digital data acquisition equipment with the capabilities noted did exist However sample rates of greater than 200 megasamples per second are not financially attractive Instead a data entry device was chosen to enter other data by hand This allows analog data such as photographs with very fast risetimes to be digitized Thus this data acquisition process allows entry of very fast data as well as data acquired prior to the development of the system and data acquired outside the laboratory This data acquisition process was needed in the study of the switch
13. An invalid I O operation has been attempted The Mass Storage ROM failed self test The The The The command or statement is valid for disc only file directory on the storage medium is full specified volume label wasn t found specified mass storage unit specifier is invalid A read verify error was encountered The command cannot be executed because the mass storage medium is full 399 Error Number Cod E conditi 129 The storage medium is damaged MEDIUM 130 The storage medium is not initialized the drive DISC latch is open or the drive number specified is not present 131 The interface select code or device address TIMEOUT specified is not present or system hardware has failed Error Number amp Code 110 I O CARD 111 I O OPER 112 P P ROM 113 122 123 DIGITIZE 124 ISC 125 ADDR 126 PLOTTER 400 E C liti The interface module failed self test and therefore needs repair An invalid operation has been sent to the interface module The Plotter Printer ROM failed self test If this error should occur do not use the ROM with your HP 83 85 Contact your local HP 83 85 dealer or HP sales and service office These error numbers are reserved for I O module errors Please refer to the appropriate interface installation document for the error conditions that generate these error numbers 1 Digitize process for DIGITIZE LIMIT LOCATE or CLIP has been interrupted from the
14. BEEP DISP Please choose a number between DISP 0 and VALS P 3 2 WAIT 4500 GOTO 4230 Z I Z I P 1 2 RETURN REM REM REM DUPLICATE CURVE REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP The processing package cannot DISP handle 2 curves of the same DISP type i e both current Do DISP you want the curves stored DISP seperately Y N INPUT C IF C N THEN RETURN C Y Q Cl 1 Pl 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP Curve 1 will be stored first WAIT 4500 RETURN 159 Input zeroline position Entry valid No notify user Re enter position Set zero offset Store separately No return Yes set flags 160 PLOT The PLOT program generates all plots of curves with respect to time e g voltage vs time The data is stored in two 2 possible formats unprocessed and processed The unprocessed data is read into the computer and plotted using the values stored in the control registers The control registers contain information regarding the number of points in the curve the number of x divisions value per x division time value per y division e g voltage curve type i e voltage or current and time and date of measurement The processed data is read into the computer and plotted using values calculated by the computer The program scans the given curve values finds the minimum and maximum values and plots the curve to fill 80 of the plotting a
15. INPUT Y IF LEN Y lt 10 THEN 6280 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Please choose DISP a name with less than 11 DISP letters WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 6180 CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP DISP DISP Storing data in ON ERROR GOTO 6380 CREATE Y 138 8 OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO Y PRINT 1 T ASSIGNF 1 TO RETURN OFF ERROR IF ERRN 63 THEN 6320 CLEAR BEEP DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN PURGE X GOTO 6320 CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter another name INPUT Y GOTO 6310 REM REM REM DUPLICATE CURVE REM SUBROUTINE REM REM 140 Input aux file name Name too long Yes notify user Re enter name No store aux data Trap file create error Create file space Open file Print aux array Close file File already exist Yes notify user Purge file Yes purge amp cont No enter new name Retry storage 6550 6560 6570 6580 6590 6600 6610 6620 6630 6640 6650 6660 6670 141 CLEAR BEEP DISP The processing package cannot DISP handle 2 curves of the same DISP type i e both current Do DISP you want the curves stored DISP separately Y N INPUT C Store curves separately IF C N THEN RETURN t No return C Y Q Cl 1 Yes set flags CLEAR BEEP DISP The curve from plug in A will DISP be stored first WAIT 4500 RETURN 142 NORML The
16. If the operator chooses to take data K1 the program lists the equipment available for taking data 1 Tektronix 7612D Digitizer depress Kl 2 Nicolet Digital O scope depress K2 3 HP Multiplexer and Voltmeter depress K3 4 HP Graphics Tablet depress K4 Should the operator opt to use the Tektronix 7612D K1 or the Nicolet Digital O scope K2 the program will ask if the operator wants to take additional measurements with the HP Multiplexer and HP Voltmeter 3 6 Equi t Availabili LE Handli Thus based upon the operator s choice the program polls the HPIB to see if the equipment necessary for the desired operation is present The pieces of equipment necessary for each operation are 1 taking data disk drive and selected instrument s 2 processing data disk drive 3 plotting curves disk drive and plotter 4 plotting I vs 227 v only disk drive and plotter and 5 using graphics not functional at this time If the program cannot locate the device s on the HPIB the program will print the message The DEVICES is OFF Turn ON the DEVICES and press CONTINUE In this case DEVICES is the name of the device which is not present on the HPIB In most cases the device mentioned has not been turned on If the operator finds that the device is on and still receives the message to turn on the device check to make sure the HPIB has been connected from the computer to the device These actions should cure most problems
17. Last bkpt W2 W2 W1 1 B0 1 No concat substrings W1 W1 B0 1 LEN W1 Shorten workspace FOR K 1 TO 10 B Right justify DISP NEXT K DISP W2S Disp substring L L 1 Increment disp count IF L gt 13 THEN L L 13 WAIT 4500 Screen full wait 4 5s NEXT J GOTO 2850 Next substring DISP EW1S No display substring L L 1 Increment disp count IF L gt 13 THEN L L 13 WAIT 4500 Screen full wait 4 5s NEXT I Next substring RETURN REM REM REM ACTIVE SUBROUTINE REM 1 ARM TIME BASE REM 2 READ DATA REM REM IF WS A THEN W1S ARM A A 1 For timebase A only IF WS B THEN W1S ARM B A 1 For timebase B only IF WS C THEN W1 ARM A B A 2 WS A For both timebases SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Listener 7612D OUTPUT 7 W1 Arm timebase s P 1 3 DATE Store date P 2 3 TIME Store start time CLEAR BEEP DISP Time base Q armed DISP DISP Now simply take measurement DISP When the curve appears on the 130 3050 DISP monitor press CONTINUE PAUSE 3060 CLEAR BEEP 3070 DISP Do you wish to keep this data 3080 DISP Y N 3090 INPUT Q Keep data 3100 IF Q N THEN RETURN No return to main prog 3110 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Yes Listener 7612D 3120 OUTPUT 7 READ amp WS Ask for curve data 3130 SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 Talker 7612D 3140 TRANSFER 7 TO D FHS EOI Fast transfer of data 315
18. unrounded time at 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded time at 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2500 PRINT VAL A A 2510 PRINT PRINT 2520 A 0 2530 PRINT To is the time at 10 of the 2540 PRINT 2nd breakdown voltage 2550 K 2 2560 IF CHR P 2 5 V THEN K 3 171 2570 FOR J 1 TO P 1 4 2580 READ 1 13 K 1 P 1 4 J B 2590 IF B gt C THEN 2610 B 10 224 bkdn 2600 NEXT J No cont 2610 READ 1 13 J A Yes read the time associated with B 10 2 4 bk n voltage 2620 WS s D A GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine WS unrounded units A unrounded time at 10 of 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded time at 10 of 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2630 PRINT To VALS A AS 2640 PRINT 2650 WS Vv D C GOSUB 3290 A D A W Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded voltage at 10 of 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded voltage at 10 of 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2660 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2670 PRINT voltage at To is VALS A A 2680 PRINT 2690 K 3 2700 IF CHR P 1 5 A THEN K 2 2710 READ 1 13 K 1 P 1 4 J A Read current 2720 WS A D A GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine wS unrounded units A unrounded current at 10 of 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded current at 10 of 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2730 PRINT The value for instantaneous 274
19. 136 t Calculate x origin 1210 N 19 5 1 IP L 1 4 50 t Calculate y origin 1220 CLEAR BEEP DISP Load plotter and press CONTINUE PAUSE 1230 S1 4 P1 5 K 1 P 1 4 Calculate 13 v posn 1240 S2 3 P1 5 K P 1 4 Calculate last V posn 1250 READ 1 S1 B Read first value 1260 A B C B Set default min max 1270 CLEAR BEEP DISP Scanning A 184 1280 FOR J S1 1 TO S2 1290 READ 1 J B 1300 IF B gt A THEN A B Set if new max 1310 IF B lt C THEN C B Set if new min 1320 NEXT J 1330 V 5 4 A C P 3 2 Cl C Calculate vertical magn div P 3 2 of vertical divisions A maximum value in curve C minimum value in curve 1340 WS CHRS P K 1 5 Set units 1350 D V Q Y0 2 GOSUB 2060 V D C C1 Set values for magnitude division rounding routine D unrounded vert magn div YO vert magn scaling indicator V returns as rounded vert magn div Cl returns as scaled minimum 1360 V1 W Assign scaled vertical units 1370 S 1 4 P1 5 I 1 P 1 4 Calculate 15t I posn 1380 S2 3 P1 5 I P 1 4 Calculate last I posn 1390 READ 1 S1 B Read first value 1400 A B G B Set default min amp max 1410 CLEAR BEEP DISP Scanning B 1420 FOR J S1 1 TO S2 1430 READ 1 J B 1440 IF B gt A THEN A B Set if new max 1450 IF B lt G THEN G B Set if new min 1460 NEXT J 1470 U 5 4 A G P 3 2 C1 G Calculate horiz magn div P 3 2 of horiz divisions A max
20. 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 150 PRINT Softkey Assignments PRINT PRINT PRINT 1 END PRINT End of curve Digitize to PRINT start next curve PRINT PRINT 2 STORE PRINT Transfer curves to tape or PRINT disk PRINT PRINT 3 NEW SET PRINT Reinitialize and process new PRINT set of curves PRINT PRINT 4 FINISHED PRINT Finished with this program PRINT PRINT 5 DEVICE DATA PRINT Print out device data PRINT PRINT 6 16 Not used FOR I 1 TO 5 PRINT PRINT NEXT I RETURN REM REM REM DIGITIZER SUBROUTINE REM A CHECK STATUS REM B GET DATA REM REM OUTPUT 706 SG DP Set for digitization B 7 BS RS Bl 1 Check softkey bit 7 read softkey store 1 input value P BP24 125 5 BP36 125 5 Set softkey tones GOSUB 1700 Digitizing routine IF S THEN 1690 If status bit set then return 151 1660 B 2 B 0D B1 3 Check digitized point bit 2 output point store 3 input values 1670 P BP36 125 5 Set point tone 1680 GOSUB 1700 Digitizing routine 1690 RETURN 1700 REM 1710 REM 1720 REM STATUS SUBROUTINE 1730 REM A CHECK SOFTKEY 1740 REM B CHECK POINT 1750 REM 1760 REM 1770 OUTPUT 706 os Ask for status byte 1780 ENTER 706 S Accept response 1790 S BIT S B Check bit in status 1800 IF NOT S THEN 1870 If
21. 3 7_Unusual Error Actions However if the device is on and connected to the HPIB and the computer still generates the message to turn the device on there is a definite problem Under these circumstances a hardware problem probably exists Four 4 probable areas to consider are 1 the HPIB does not have enough devices on line and powered up 2 the address of the machine s HPIB address has been changed 3 the HPIB card in the computer has failed or 4 the Input Output I O ROM in the computer has failed 3 7 1 1 ficient P The most likely problem is the HPIB does not have enough active listeners The HPIB has a limited transmission length These limitations are outlined in the various user s manuals These manuals each have a section on HPIB structure and operations The quickest way to ascertain whether the HPIB has adequate power is to turn on all of the devices attached to the HPIB The program should function properly 32 7 2 Incorrect Address The next probable problem is the machine s HPIB address has been changed Appendix B has a list of the HPIB addresses for the devices in the system Compare the device address on this list to the DIP switch which controls the machine s address In most cases the DIP switch for 228 the address is on the back panel of the machine In all cases the location of the DIP switch is listed in that machine s user s manual 3 1 3 Hardware Failure If these actions do not remedy the situation
22. 5 1 OvervieW o ooooooooocooooornomcrccrcncrrsannonos 5 2 Main ProgIaAM oooooooooooooocooronconanonononno s 217 218 TABLE OF CONTENTS cont 5 3 Scaling Opti0M o oooooonomooooooooooo a 234 5 4 NOW Curve Seto 234 5 5 QUito ds AA aa 234 5 6 Plotting Options A ais 234 5 7 Second breakdown StatisticS E 235 5 8 Reference ERAS ASIA 236 I VS V PLOTTING PACKAGE o oooooooooooooocmooomomoo nooo 237 6 1 Overview ADA DAA A ee 237 ue ACCION ais 237 6 3 Reference EUA E AAA A 237 USING TEKTRONIX 7612D AS A STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE 238 Tel Overviews SSA a ES A A ORR ns 238 T42 M in PLOGLAM ra add 238 7 3 Change Settings AR a a a 238 Ta QUIE E a AOS 239 7 5 ROLETONCO cria EEE a ee 239 USING TEKTRONIX 7612D AS A SINGLE SHOT OSCILLOSCOPE 240 8 1 Overview SetuP oooooooooo ooo AAA 240 8 2 Main Program SCC up ici sei denis rosas ai 240 8 2 1 Voltmeter Setu up s ecsscscsccsesseoseeseeosoo 241 8 2 2 Baseline OrientatioN oooooooooo ooo 241 8 2 3 Instru um nt SOU e Aaa 242 8 2 4 Zero Compensati0N o oooooooooomooooo ooo 242 8 2 5 Settings Checkout dies sas sa cues os 242 8 2 6 True Unit Computatlon o ici sins os 243 9 3 Data Acquisltlio0M is cidiscoon siii ae 243 8 4 Data Storage ooooooooooooonocoscrcrrnsorornonoso 244 8 4 1 File Creation ErtrorS oooooooooooooomooo 244
23. 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 122 REMOTE 7 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 Take control HPIB IF WS A THEN SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 1 Listen left plug IF W B THEN SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 2 Listen rt plug OUTPUT 7 CPL GND Ground input ON KEY 1 CONT GOTO 490 Set cont branch CLEAR BEEP Set zero references DISP Adjust the POSITION knob on DISP plug in W to set zero line KEY LABEL REMOTE 7 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 Take control HPIB SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Listener 7612D OUTPUT 7 ARM amp WS amp Arm timebase LOCAL 7 WAIT 50 Go local for 50 ms OUTPUT 7 MTRIG Trigger timebase GOTO 430 Repeat IF Pl 1 OR W B THEN 520 Another curve WS B Yes set other timebase GOTO 340 Repeat procedure LOCAL 7 REMOTE 7 No take control HPIB SEND 7 CMD SPE UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 Config 7612D for poll Q SPOLL 7 Serial poll 7612D Q1 ws IF Pl 2 THEN Q1 C CLEAR BEEP Set 7612D front panel DISP Enter the measurement settings DISP on the front panel of the 7612D DISP When entry is complete press DISP the REMOTE button on the front DISP panel lower center GOSUB 1520 Settings routine WS Q15 IF QS Y THEN 570 Set bad rst frt panel P 1 2 A2 Volts div for crv 1 P 2 2 B2 t Volts div for crv 2 IF A3 1 AND B3 1 THEN 760 Single records 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 7
24. A 2 amp amp VALS VAL A LEN A 1 LEN AS Build month day portion of string CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the year Ex 1985 INPUT D B1 VALS D AS AS amp amp B15 LEN B1 1 LEN B1 Add year portion of string Add hour minute portion of string SVALS IP P 2 3 3600 VALS IP FP P 2 3 3600 60 178 4630 AS ASE amp VALS IP FP FP P 2 3 3600 60 60 5 Add seconds portion of string 4640 IF IP FP FP P 2 3 3600 60 60 lt 10 THEN AS AS amp 0 amp VALS IP FP FP P 2 3 3600 60 60 5 4650 CSIZE H 50 10 18 4 Change char size 4660 LORG 4 Label orig lwr cnt 4670 MOVE P 3 1 5 U A 4680 LABEL A Plot date time 4690 CLEAR BEEP 4700 DISP Enter the label for this graph 4710 DISP DISP Maximum length of 40 char 4720 INPUT AS Input plot title 4730 CLEAR BEEP 4740 DISP Enter the y coordinate for the 4750 DISP label of this graph 4760 INPUT A Input title posn 4770 MOVE P 3 1 5 U A 4780 LABEL AS Plot title 4790 RETURN 179 LY The I Y program generates a plot for current vs voltage The data is read into the computer and plotted using values calculated by the computer The program scans the given curve values finds the minimum and maximum values and plots the curve to fill 80 of the plotting area The I V program allows the operator to scale the size of the plot and to plot the curves on either a grid
25. CHAPTER Es 2i TABLE OF CONTENTS e e ee INTRODUCTION ua a SSN wa AAA eee AGRA SYSTEM COMPONENTS oa aaa e adi 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 235 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 TA FOCUS OM et AE AS A E ees be EE A Data Acquisition CapabilitieS sssssssssesssss 2 2 1 Slow Measurement Capabilities 2 2 2 Intermediate Measurement Capabilities 2 2 3 Fast Measurement Capabilities 2 2 4 Very Fast Measurement Capabilities Hand Entry Data Storage Capabilities reserse sree RARAS Hardcopy Output Capablliti8S ec a e System Computational Capabilities Introductions AAA E RES Data Acquisition SubSYSteEMms crac vids a aio 3 2 1 Slow Measurement SubsysteM ooooooo 3 2 2 Intermediate Measurement Subsystem 3 2 3 Fast Measurement SubsysteM o ooooooooo o o 3 2 4 Very Fast Measurement Subsystem Hand Entry Hardcopy Output SubsySteMiia resis et seers Mathematical Conditioning Subsystem iv oO Oo 3 DH DB N 10 11 12 13 13 15 15 16 16 18 21 22 24 26 28 29 29 4 2 Slow Measurement Subsystem Tutorial 4 3 Intermediate Measurement Subsystem Tutorial 4 4 Fast Measurement Subsystem Tutorial 4 5 Very Fast Measurement Subsystem Tutorial Hand Entry 4 6 Hardcopy Output Subsystem Tutorial 4 7 Mathematical Processing Subsystem Tut
26. Compute value for zero compensation Print out settings there another all the settings No channel correct 9 No Yes Set flag for correct 7 settings correct settings flag set Wait 4500 there multiple Notify user there are records too many records Notify user record record length too long length too long 337 Is there an Yes Wait 4500 Notify user attenuator etc entry incorrect Read probe multiplier there another Compute factors plug in there an external Yes Compute factor clock No Enter time base to be armed Is entry valid Yes Store date amp time Notify user to take measurement E Notify user entry incorrect 338 Wait 4500 Do you wish to aa keep data No Do you wish to change settings 339 Set separate flag Read channel Notify user Notify user curves data storing stored A then B there another channel 9 you want stored separately No Enter mass storage 12 Notify user cannot Enter file name process 2 same type Wait 4500 Is Are Notify user both curves file name name too long too long same type 9 No 340 p Create file Wait 4500 Notify user to pick Yes Turn off error new ma
27. Currently operating on X ON KEY 1 Plot GOTO 980 ON KEY 2 Scale GOTO 760 ON KEY 3 New set GOTO 470 ON KEYS 4 Finished GOTO 520 KEY LABEL GOTO 460 ASSIGN 1 TO CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the new file name INPUT X GOTO 190 ASSIGN 1 TO CLEAR BEEP DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 1 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 END REM MASS STORAGE REM SUBROUTINE REM 1 ESTABLISH MEDIUM 181 Read control registers Set start read posn Plot option Scale option New data set option Finished option Loop until choice Close file Input new file name Restart process Close file Return to Autost Load Autost prog 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 REM REM IF R TAPE THEN 740 IF R DISK01 THEN 720 MASS STORAGE IS D700 GOTO 750 MASS STORAGE IS D701 GOTO 750 MASS STORAGE IS T RETURN REM REM REM SCALE SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the scale factor for DISP plotting less than 2 25 INPUT H IF H lt 2 25 AND H gt 0 THEN 900 CLEAR BEEP DISP Please pick a scale factor DISP on the range 0 lt H lt 2 25 WAIT 4500 GOTO 810 GOTO 410 REM REM REM PLOT SUBROUTINE REM 1 FIND CURVE REM 2 PLOT CURVE
28. INDEX 85 86 Autost The HP85 Desktop Computer has limited memory space Therefore to develop an effective data acquisition system the software was divided into several smaller packages These packages are controlled and accessed by Autost The Autost program serves as the central program control for the system The program controls initialization of the system clock and calendar and functional program branching The Autost program allows the operator to select from the functions 1 data acquisition 2 data processing 3 data plotting Based upon the selections made by the operator the program ascertains whether the devices necessary to carry out the desired function is online and runs the program which performs the desired function After completion each of the programs return to Autost 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM MISSION CONTROL 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 1 18 85 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 REM Chuck Graves wizard 90 REM 100 REM 110 COM x 10 120 GOSUB 400 130 CLEAR BEEP 140 DISP Press key for desired function 150 DISP DISP K1 Choose among data takers 160 DISP K2 Process data 170 DISP K3 Plot curves 180 DISP K4 Plot I V curve only 190 DISP K5 Use graphics capabilities 200 ON KEY 1 Data GOTO 270 210 ON KEY 2 Process GOTO 1690 220 ON KEY 3 Plot GOTO 1970 230 ON KEY 4 I V only GOTO 1990 240 ON KEY 5 Graphics
29. INITIALIZATION REM SUBROUTINE REM REM FOR I 1 TO 4 FOR J 1 TO 256 X I J 0 Y 1 3 0 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO 5 P I J 0 NEXT J P 1 5 86 NEXT 1 FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 4 C I J 1000 NEXT J NEXT I T 1 0 T 2 0 R D700 RETURN REM REM REM DATA ACQUISITION REM SUBROUTINE REM REM FOR J 1 TO Pl OUTPUT 709 AC amp VAL C 1 J OUTPUT 724 R S VALS C 2 3 WAIT 500 TRIGGER 724 ENTER 724 Y J 1 X J I TIME T 2 101 Initialize time Initialize voltage Initialize cntl reg t Set units to V Init chan rng reg Default mass storage Close chan on DACU Set rng on DVM Let voltage settle Trigger DVM Store DVM voltage Store time 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 102 NEXT J RETURN REM REM REM MASS STORAGE REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP Where do you want to store these DISP curves DISK00 DISK01 TAPE INPUT os Input destination IF Q DISK01 THEN R D701 IF Q TAPE THEN R T MASS STORAGE IS R Set mass storage unit RETURN REM REM REM STORE SUBROUTINE REM 1 CREATE FILE REM 2 STORE CURVE REM REM ON ERROR GOTO 2220 Trap file create error CREATE X 10 2 P I 4 8 Create file sp
30. REM REM 182 t Set for disk 0 Set for disk 1 Set for tape Input scale factor Scale factor valid No notify user Re enter scale factor Yes return main prog I 2 K 3 K current I voltage L 3 I position of current array in file K position of voltage array in file 183 I horiz file type K vert file type L curve posn ind 990 IF CHRS P 2 5 V THEN I 3 K 2 Switch I for V if stored current then voltage 1000 CLEAR BEEP 1010 DISP What title do you want for the 1020 DISP I axis of this 1030 DISP K vs I curve 1040 INPUT U Input horiz title 1050 IF LEN U gt 25 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP No more than 25 characters WAIT 4500 GOTO 1000 If title is too long notify user and re enter horiz title 1060 CLEAR BEEP 1070 DISP What title do you want for the 1080 DISP K axis of this 1090 DISP K vs I curve 1100 INPUT V Input vertical title 1110 IF LEN V gt 25 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP No more than 25 characters WAIT 4500 GOTO 1060 If title is too long notify user and re enter vertical title 1120 A P 1 4 2048 A of 2048 byte blks 1130 B FP A t B fractional part A 1140 Q IP A 1 Q of reads curve 1 1150 IF B 0 THEN Q Q 1 Allow for integer A 1160 CLEAR BEEP 1170 DISP Do you want a grid or graph 1180 DISP GRID GRAPH 1190 INPUT Q Choose grid or graph 1200 M 18 FP L 1 2
31. Then the program asks Do you want to use the system voltmeter to make additional readings Y N If so the program polls the network to ascertain the availability of the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit and the HP3437A System Voltmeter The program then loads and runs the program NIC 85 discussed in Appendix C Chapter 8 If the operator chooses to make use of the system multiplexer and system voltmeter the program polls the system to see if the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit and the HP3437A System Voltmeter are available Then the program loads and runs the program HP DAS discussed in Appendix C Chapter 9 If the operator chooses to use the graphics tablet the program checks the network for the availability of the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive and the HP9111A Graphics Tablet Then the software loads and runs the program TABLET discussed in Appendix C Chapter 10 If the operator chooses to process a set of curves then the software polls the network for the availability of the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive Then the software loads and runs the program MATH If the operator chooses to plot a set of curves then the software polls the network for the availability of the HP9895A Flexible Disk 32 Drive and the HP7470A Plotter Then the software loads and runs the appropriate program J V for current versus voltage plots PLOT for the remainder of the plots All of the previously
32. curves are stored in the order 1 time 2 voltage 3 current 4 power 5 energy 292 Initialize registers Enter file name Is No file name known Wait 4500 Is file name Notify user file Assign buffer to too long name is too long mass storage file No Enter mass storage Wait 4500 Notify user to pick Is there an error error No 130 B2 new mass storage Notify user of unusual error Does file have two Notify user program curves Cannot process Is file too Notify user file is too large large No Enter registers Om Notify user that program is sorting Read beginning x value for both curves Set flag for curve with smaller beginning x x value gt larger beginning x value Yes Do you want to process another file No Load and run Autost No Read next x value for flagged curve tore larger beginning x value as lower limit of unflagged curve Store x value as lower limit of unflagged curve Read final x value for both curves Set flag for curve with larger final x Store smaller final x value as upper limit of unflagged curve Read previous x value for flagged curve x value lt smaller final x value Yes
33. digitized Initialize graphics tablet Notify user to digitize graph corners Beep once Store corner position O Calculate scale factors xy to Vit Enter value per horizontal division No Calculate rotational Enter value per correction factors vertical division Correct corners Store start time for rotation Enter of horizontal div Store date Enter of vertical div data digitized Is entry Notify user valid entry incorrect Yes No Q Was Yes Yes a softkey digitized Branch to softkey function 7 O Notify user of Branch to key function Has a key been curve keyed functions pressed Notify user to digitize curve No 365 Compensate data for rotational error Is data register full Notify user to digitize softkey or press key to continue Yes Notify user data 110 Notify user that register is full digitization is complete Do you wish to re enter No Was a key pressed Was a softkey digitized Was data digitized ues Branch to key function a Branch to softkey function 366 o a Have you stored present data Do you y Yes wish to digitize Load and run Autost more data O es lt P Enter file name Is Wait 4500 file name Notify
34. for the Printer Plotter ROM and for the Mass Storage ROM respectively HP 85 Computer Error Codes Default values Error errors 1 8 only with Number Error Condition DEFAULT ON Math Errors 1 thru 13 1 Underflow expression underflows machine 0 2 Overflow 9 99999999999E499 Expression overflows machine Attempt to store value gt 99999 or lt 99999 in INTEGER variable 99999 Attempt to store value gt 9 9999E99 or lt 9 9999E99 in SHORT variable 9 9999E99 3 COT or CSC of n 180 n integer 9 99999999999E499 4 TAN or SEC of n 90 n odd integer 9 99999999999E499 5 zero raised to negative power 9 99999999999E499 6 Zero raised to zero power 1 7 Null data Uninitialized string variable or missing string function assignment Jont Uninitialized numeric variable or missing numeric function assignment 0 8 Division by zero 9 99999999999E499 9 Negative value raised to non integer Remaining errors power are non defautable 10 Square root of negative number 11 Argument parameter out of range ATN2 0 0 ASN or ACSN 1 lt n lt 1 Error 382 Number Error Condition 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ON expression GOTO GOSUB expression out of range Logarithm of zero Logarithm of negative number Not used System Errors 15 thru 25 System error correct by reloading program pressing ENDLINE or turning system off then on again Continue before run program not allocat
35. 06 A instantaneous power at To is 387 W The value for instantaneous energy at To is 33 uJ Next the software calculates the time from t to second breakdown and the change in energy from t to second breakdown The time from To to 2nd breakdown is 0839 us The change in energy from To to 2nd breakdown is 133 uJ After completing the printout of the second breakdown characteristics the software then returns to the available options noted earlier If the operator chooses to do so the software changes the scale of the plots In so doing the operator is allowed to control the size of the plot Enter the scale factor for plotting less than 2 25 55 Once the operator is prepared to proceed to another set of curves the software prompts What is the new file name To this the operator responds e TRNTST and the software begins the operations again at the initialization process outlined in the beginning of this section When the operator is finished the software loads and runs the program Autost MISSION CONTROL will now resume control The software package PLOT was developed to generate plots of current voltage power and energy Another useful plot is one of the current versus the voltage Unfortunately due to the limited memory capacity of the HP85 this option could not be included in the program PLOT Instead a second program I V was developed The program I V was developed specifically for plotti
36. 1 amp 2 Q number of read passes S1 start index intrp curve 1 T1 read offset for curve 1 1360 FOR I 1 TO Q 1370 CLEAR BEEP 1380 DISP Process K of 4 1390 DISP Reading I of Q 1400 GOSUB 2610 Read routine 1410 CLEAR BEEP 1420 DISP Process K of 4 1430 DISP Working I of Q 1440 IF K 3 THEN GOSUB 2040 Multiply routine 1450 IF K 4 THEN GOSUB 2160 Integrate routine 1460 CLEAR BEEP 1470 DISP Process K of 4 1480 DISP Storing I of Q 1490 GOSUB 2810 Storage routine 1500 NEXT I 1510 IF K 3 THEN 1550 Curve 3 integrated 1520 K 4 Q Q3 S1 16 T1 3 P 3 3 A 0 No set values K process number 4 integrate curve 3 Q number of read passes S1 start index time T1 read offset for multiplied curve 1530 P 1 4 P 3 3 P 2 4 P 3 3 Reset of pts 1540 GOTO 1360 Integrate curve 3 1550 CLEAR BEEP Yes cont 1560 DISP What name do you want for the 1570 DISP processed data file 1580 INPUT Y Input new file name 197 1590 IF LEN Y gt 10 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large WAIT 4500 GOTO 1550 If new file name is too long notify user and re enter file name 1600 IF Y x THEN PURGE X If same name is chosen purge the unprocessed file 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 RE
37. 1 part in 8710 for data that is 301 mm by 218 mm respectively The associated error terms are subsets of this active digitizing area Thus for an oscilloscope trace captured on film with a standard format of ten 10 divisions by eight 8 73 divisions with cm per division the error terms are approximately one 1 part in 4000 of the full scale magnitude in the x direction total time in most cases and one 1 part in 3200 of the full scale magnitude in the y direction The instantaneous power is calculated by multiplying the voltage and current waveforms and can be described as Pm P AP Vm Im V AV I AT VI t VAI IAV Ava Substituting in the values for AV and AI Pm VI t V Igg 27 I Vfa 27 Veg 27 If 277 Thus the error term for the instantaneous power can be described as AP V I g 2 I Veg 277 Veg 277 If 277 The worst case error occurs for V Veg and I Ifg This yields a worse case error of AP VeglIfg 27 IgglVeg 2 Veg 27 Ifs 272 Veg Ifg 272 270 272m Veg Igg 217N 272 Since the second term is approximately the square of the first term the second term in this equation is considered to be insignificant so that the error term becomes AP Veg Ifs 2172 Pmax 2279 where Pmax is the maximum power For this data acquisition system the values for power have errors of 1 one 1 part in 2048 of Pmax using the HP System Voltmeter 2 one 1 p
38. 2250 PRINT VALS A AS 2260 PRINT 2270 A 0 Q K 3 2280 IF CHRS P 2 5 V THEN K 2 2290 READ 1 13 K 1 P 1 4 I A Read current 2nd bkdn 2300 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2310 PRINT current at 2nd breakdown is 2320 W A D A GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine WS unrounded units A unrounded current at 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded current at 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2330 PRINT VALS A AS 170 2340 PRINT 2350 READ 1 134 3 P 1 4 I A Read power 224 bkdn 2360 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2370 PRINT power at 2nd breakdown is 2380 W N D A GOSUB 3290 A D A W Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded power at 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded power at 2nd bkdn AS returns as rounded units 2390 PRINT VALS A AS 2400 PRINT 2410 READ 1 13 4 P 1 4 1 A Read energy 294 bkdn 2420 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2430 PRINT energy at 2nd breakdown is 2440 W J D A GOSUB 3290 A D A W Set values for rounding routine WS unrounded units A unrounded energy at 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded energy at 2nd bkdn AS returns as rounded units 2450 PRINT VALS A AS 2460 PRINT 2470 READ 1 13 I A Read time of 274 bkdn 2480 PRINT 2nd breakdown occurs at 2490 WS s D A GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine WS unrounded units A
39. 3 number of y divisions 4 date of the data acquisition process 5 time at the beginning of the data acquisition process 6 control register s one for each curve 7 x data for curve s 8 y data for curve s 13 4 Control Register Format The control register s have five 5 entries each They are stored in the order 1 value of x per division 2 value of y per division 3 zero location 4 number of data points in curve 5 letter representing units of curve e g V for voltage There is a control register maintained for each curve that is stored However the zero location item 3 is not used in any programs other than TABLET In the other programs item 3 of the control register is used as temporary storage of either the date or the time 13 5 Remarks This format was developed along the following premises 1 the first entry the number of curves tells the program how many control registers to read 2 the following four 4 entries are always read 3 the control registers tell the program the number of data points stored in each curve and 4 the number of data points tells the program how to read the data so that x data and y data are kept separate By storing in this format the program can use a minimum of space on the disk or tape to store all pertinent information 272 APPENDIX A STARTUP PROCEDURE 273 Turn on disk drive Insert SYSTEMS MASTER disk into drive 00 Turn on HP 85
40. 3200 Take desired auxiliary data if n 256th operation 2920 NEXT I 2930 IF E F THEN PRINT 1 7 500 H M Store volt div curve 1 2940 IF E F THEN PRINT 1 12 500 H M Store volt div curve 2 2950 IF F G THEN F G M N GOTO 2820 If another curve set values and repeat process 2960 F E S Y Set store flag 2970 ASSIGN 1 TO Close file 2980 CLEAR BEEP 2990 DISP Do you want to store another 3000 DISP set of these curves Y N 3010 3020 3030 INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN 2010 IF V Y THEN GOSUB 3390 116 Store another pair Yes repeat process No If auxiliary data was taken auxiliary storage routine 3040 3050 3060 3070 3080 3090 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 3280 3290 3300 3310 3320 3330 3340 GOTO 840 OFF ERROR IF ERRN 63 THEN 3160 CLEAR BEEP DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN PURGE X GOTO 2490 CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter another name INPUT X GOTO 2050 IF ERRNY 130 THEN 2490 CLEAR BEEP DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 GOTO 2110 REM REM REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE REM ACQUISITION REM REM CLEAR 709 CLEAR 724 OUTPUT 709 AFOAL999ACO OUTPUT 724 T3R3D 1S FOR I1 69 TO 70 T1 STEP 1 OUTPUT 709 AC amp VALS T 1 11 OUTPUT 724 R amp VALS T 1 11 T1 WAIT 500 TRIGGER 724 ENTER 724 T 1
41. 7612D will ask for the system multiplexer channel number and the system voltmeter voltage range for the measurement The channel number is a number on the range zero 0 to 999 The voltage range sets the maximum voltage the voltmeter can read The three 3 voltage ranges are 1 volt 1 volt and 10 volts After each entry the program will verify whether 1 the entry is valid i e valid channel number and valid voltage range 2 the entry is new i e the program will notify the operator if a channel number has been entered previously 8 2 2 B li orientati 1612D will notify the operator to adjust the position of the curve trace on the xy monitor The program does this to allow the operator to set an easily readable baseline If the operator has chosen to take two 2 curves the program will ask the operator to set both baselines beginning with plug in A 1612D will arm and trigger the particular plug in to generate a grounded trace This process will continue until the operator is 242 finished When the operator has set the baseline for the trace the operator will press K1 to continue 8 2 3 Instrument Setup 7612D will ask the operator to enter the instrument settings on the front panel When the program delivers this message the program activates the REMOTE switch on the front panel After the setting entry is finished the operator pushes the REMOTE switch This tells the program the entry is complete and 7612D loads all th
42. 8 and 9 The auxiliary files however should be processed by VMAUX discussed in Chapter 12 so that they are in the standard format If the operator decides to write more software in the future this discussion should help in developing consistent read and write formats 13 2 I s Fil Si The format of the data file was developed to take up a minimum of space on the disk or tape and to be flexible and accept any size of data file The restrictions on space in the processing and plotting packages are overcome by processing or plotting in blocks The files are created in logical blocks of eight 8 bits each The number of logical blocks is dependent upon the particular curve data The file has to have enough room to store the number of curves the number of x divisions the number of y divisions the date of the data acquisition process the time at the beginning of the data acquisition process the control register s one 1 register for each curve to be stored with five 5 values per control register and two 2 times the number of data points this allows for the x and y value of each data point Thus the storage files have a length given by N 5 C 5 2 P where C number of curves P total number of points for all curves and N total number of logical blocks 271 13 3 File Format The order in which the data is stored in a file is the same as above 1 number of curves in file 2 number of x divisions
43. A B Channel voltage rng 320 A IP A B IP B Make integers 330 IF A gt 1 AND A lt 1000 THEN 370 Channel valid 340 CLEAR BEEP No notify user 350 DISP Please enter a number 0 999 98 360 WAIT 4500 GOTO 270 370 IF B gt 0 AND B lt 4 THEN 410 Re enter chan rng Yes voltage rng valid 380 CLEAR BEEP No notify user 390 DISP Please enter a number 1 3 400 WAIT 4500 GOTO 270 410 FOR J 1 TO I Re enter chan rng Yes chk entries 420 IF C 1 J A THEN 470 Entered previously 430 CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 440 DISP You have already chosen that 450 DISP channel Please enter another 460 WAIT 4500 GOTO 270 470 NEXT J 480 C 1 I A C 2 1 B 490 NEXT I Re enter chan rng No store values 500 CLEAR BEEP 510 DISP Enter the time between samples 520 DISP DISP There will automatically be a 530 DISP 2 second delay between groups 540 DISP of measurements M minutes 550 DISP S seconds Seperate number from 560 DISP unit with a comma Ex 30 S 570 INPUT A A Input delay time 580 IF AS M OR A S THEN 620 Units valid 590 CLEAR BEEP No notify user 600 DISP Re enter with correct units 610 WAIT 4500 GOTO 500 620 T1 A 1000 Re enter delay time Yes convert s to ms 630 IF AS M THEN T1 T1 60 Finish for m to ms 640 IF T1 lt 1666650 THEN 690 650 CLEAR BEEP Is delay too long Yes notify user 660 DISP Maximum delay of 27 775
44. DISKO0O1 TAPE DISK00 In order to display the capabilities of the system four 4 curves are acquired before notifying the computer that the transfer is ready Since there were more than two 2 curves to be transferred the software notifies the operator There are 4 curves but the processing package can only handle two curves per run unless both curves are the same type i e both current In that case only 1 curve per file Which two curves do you want paired together 1 4 37 Separate curves by a comma 1 4 To store single curves enter number twice 1 1 The curves that are acquired reflect two 2 pairs of readings Thus the operator enters the first pair 1 2 for the first storage cycle The software displays the message Storing data in NICTST At that time the software creates space for the file and stores the data Since there are more than one 1 pair of readings the computer asks Do you want to store another set of these curves Y N Again the set of four 4 curves are taken to reflect two 2 distinct pairs of readings Therefore the operator enters Y At that point the software again asks for a pair to be stored together To this request the operator responds 3 4 Whereupon the computer proceeds to store the other pair of curves After completing the storage process since the auxiliary voltage system has been used the software asks What name do you want for the auxiliary file The operator
45. Drive This unit has two 2 disk drives which are accessible to the computer Each flexible disk can 12 hold over 1 18 megabytes of information This compares to the 210 kilobyte capacity of a magnetic tape Aside from data storage the disk drives are used to store the programs controlling each of the operations performed by the system Due to the limited memory of the computer the software was configured into a set of stand alone programs Each program controls a particular operation for example there is a program for controlling the Tektronix 7612D Since the software was developed as a set of programs the time advantage of the disk drive again became apparent Programs stored on a floppy disk can be loaded and run much faster The disk drives can transfer data at an average rate of 23 kilobytes per second In comparison the tape drive can transfer data at a mere 650 bytes per second Thus the disk drive proved to be indispensable in the function of the system Since the disk drive has two 2 units one is designated as the program drive and the other is designated as the data drive 2 4 Hard output Capabiliti A necessary support component for the data acquisition and storage capabilities was the HP7470A Plotter This plotter was chosen for its speed and accuracy The plotter served to complement the hardcopy capabilities of the computer The computer has an on board thermal printer plotter This printer plotter is used prim
46. FACTOR REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ENTER 714 H HS UPCS H Z 1 VAL H 1 1 Z 2 VAL HS 2 2 Z 3 VAL HS 3 3 Z 4 VAL HS 4 8 Z 5 VAL HS 9 13 Z 6 VAL H 14 20 2 7 VAL H 21 27 RETURN REM REM REM STORAGE SUBROUTINE REM A CONVERT DATA REM B STORE DATA REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP What name do you want for the DISP storage file INPUT X IF LEN X lt 10 THEN 2110 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Please enter No store values Input file name Name too long Yes notify user 112 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 DISP a name with less than 11 DISP letters WAIT 4500 GOTO 2010 CLEAR BEEP DISP Where do you want the curves DISP stored DISK00 DISK01 TAPE INPUT Q IF Q TAPE THEN RS T IF Q DISK01 THEN R D701 MASS STORAGE IS R IF P1 lt 3 THEN 2400 CLEAR BEEP DISP There are VALS P1 curves but DISP the processing package can only DISP handle two curves per run DISP unless both curves are the same DISP type i e both current In that DISP case only 1 curve per file DISP Which two curves do you want DISP paired together 1 4 113 Re enter name Enter data de
47. FILE FORMAT ooooooooooooooooonononnronroooo 270 13 1 Introduction 6 ein css E a 270 13 2 Logical File Size a Gir Sigs Sei Sas Suave Bo Gta aw aes 270 13 3 File Format ere DN ARIAS 271 13 4 Control Register Format O 4s wed ae oe Ree a 271 13 5 RemarkS cccccccccccccccccescsccrsnssessscescnsenes 271 APPENDICES STARTUP PROCEDURE oooooooooooooonoonoonsn nora 272 B SYSTEM HPIB ADDRESSES oooooooooooooonononooonaraoo 274 C SYSTEM FLOW CHARTS oooooooooooonnonoonconnonsoooo o 276 D HP 85 ERROR CODES oooooooooooooroooooconnooooono ooso 380 221 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION The systems software is a package of programs designed to control a set of digital data takers using a Hewlett Packard 85 desktop computer The software was prepared with the intent of simplifying the data acquisition process by providing 1 an operator computer interface which minimizes the need for operator expertise with each individual machine 2 a consistent data format for ease of future data retrieval and manipulation and 3 a consistent package of data conditioning programs to handle preliminary conditioning of data The systems software was designed with emphasis on flexibility and ease of use As a result some compromises were necessary for the final development of the programs In developing an easily understood or user friendly system the necessity arose to place limitations on siz
48. GOTO 2230 250 KEY LABEL 260 GOTO 260 270 CLEAR BEEP OFF KEY 5 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 DISP K3 HP Multiplexer amp Voltmeter DISP K4 HP Graphics Tablet ON KEY 1 7612D GOTO 540 ON KEY 2 Nicolet GOTO 910 ON KEY 3 HP Mux GOTO 1200 DISP Press key for desired equipment DISP K2 Nicolet Digital O scope DISP DISP Kl Tektronix 7612D Digitizer 87 Make file name common Initialize registers Display program options Acquisition option Processing option Plotting option I V plot option Graphics option Loop until choice Display data acquisition options Tek 7612D option Nicolet option HP DACU VM option 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 ON KEY 4 Tablet GOTO 1410 KEY LABEL GOTO 380 END REM REM REM INITIALIZATION REM SUBROUTINE REM REM SET TIMEOUT 7 10000 ON ERROR GOSUB 510 IF X NULL THEN RETURN IF DATE lt 101 OR DATE gt 1231 THEN GOSUB 2660 RETURN IF ERRN 7 THEN X NULL OFF ERROR RETURN REM REM REM 7612D SYSTEM REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ON ERROR GOSUB 890 CLEAR BEEP DISP Do you want to use the 7612D as DISP a normal O scope or a one shot DISP storage scope NORM SINGLE INPUT Q A 700 AS disk drive GOSUB 740 A 702 A digitizer
49. IF D gt 20 AND D lt 25 THEN D 25 IF D gt 25 AND D lt 50 THEN D 50 IF D gt 50 THEN D 1 W k amp W C1 C1 1000 RETURN REM TESTB SUBROUTINE Round number to 3 significant digits E 0 FOR F 1 TO 3 D D 10 IF D lt 1 THEN 3830 E E 1 NEXT F D D 10 D IP D 0005 1000 1000 10 E RETURN REM STRING SUBROUTINE Change from strings of m or k to acceptable prefixes For example kkk corresponds to 109 or G E 0 FOR F 1 TO LEN WS 1 IF WS F F k THEN E E 3 Increment engr ind IF WS F FJ m THEN E E 3 Decrement engr ind NEXT F IF E 12 THEN WS T EWS LEN WS LEN WS IF E 9 THEN WS G amp WS LEN WS LEN WS IF E 6 THEN WS M amp WS LEN W LEN WS IF E 3 THEN WS k 4WS LEN WS LEN WS IF E 0 THEN WS WS LEN WS LEN WS 176 3970 IF E 3 THEN WS m 6WS LEN WS LEN WS 3980 IF E 6 THEN WS u WS LEN WS LEN WS 3990 IF E 9 THEN WS n amp WS LEN WS LEN WS 4000 IF E 12 THEN WS p 6 WS LEN WS LEN WS 4010 IF E 15 THEN WS f GWS LEN WS LEN WS 4020 IF E 18 THEN WS a WS LEN WS LEN WS 4030 IF X0 2 THEN X0 10 E Scale for time 4040 IF Y0 2 THEN Y0O 10 E Scale for magn 4050 RETURN 4060 REM INITIALIZATION 4070 REM SUBROUTINE 4080 CLEAR BEEP 4090 DISP DISP Initializing 4100 T 1 Unprocessed file 4110 I time Horiz axis time 4120 FOR I 1 TO 2048 4130 X 1 0 Initiali
50. Restart process Close file Return to Autost Load Autost prog Disk error no retry Yes notify user Re assign mass storage Select disk 0 163 690 MASS STORAGE IS D701 or select disk 1 700 GOTO 720 710 MASS STORAGE IS T or select tape 720 RETURN 730 REM SCALE SUBROUTINE 740 CLEAR BEEP 750 DISP Enter the scale factor for 760 DISP plotting less than 2 25 770 INPUT H Enter new scale factor 780 IF H lt 2 25 AND H gt 0 THEN 830 Scale factor valid 790 CLEAR BEEP No notify user 800 DISP Please pick a scale factor 810 DISP on the range 0 lt H lt 2 25 820 WAIT 4500 GOTO 740 Re enter scale factor 830 GOTO 370 Return to main prog 840 REM PLOT SUBROUTINE 850 I 1 K 2 K voltage L 1 I position of time array in file for voltage curve K position of voltage array in file K type of curve L curve position index Default values are for processed data files voltage is curve 1 860 IF CHRS P 1 5 A AND CHRS P 2 5 V THEN DISP Only current WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If curve 1 is current and curve 2 is not voltage notify user and return to main program 870 IF CHR P 2 5 A AND CHRS P 1 5 V THEN DISP Only current WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If curve 2 is current and curve 1 is not voltage notify user and return to main program 880 IF CHRS P 2 5 V THEN K 3 Voltage is curve 2 890 IF T 1 AND K 3 THEN I 2 K 4 Change values for unproc
51. Setup After initializing all the registers NIC85 will ask whether or not the operator wishes to use the system voltmeter to take additional measurements If not the program will proceed to the measurement process Otherwise the program will ask for the number of channels to be monitored by the system multiplexer The program is designed to store a maximum of four 4 channels Once the operator has entered a valid entry 7612D will ask for the system multiplexer channel number and the system voltmeter voltage range for the measurement The channel number is a number on the range zero 0 to 999 The voltage range sets the maximum voltage the voltmeter 249 can read The three 3 voltage ranges are 1 volt 1 volt and 10 volts After each entry the program will verify whether 1 the entry is valid i e valid channel number and valid voltage range 2 the entry is new i e the program will notify the operator if a channel number has been entered previously 9 3 Data A isiti NIC85 will notify the operator to take a measurement and pause The program waits until the operator has pressed CONTINUE At this point the operator needs to take the measurement Unlike 7612D NIC85 does not trigger the Nicolet Instead the program waits for the operator to make a valid measurement Once the operator has taken a measurement and presses CONTINUE NIC85 will input normalization factors from the Nicolet These factors tell the program among othe
52. System Voltmeter which perform data acquisition 2 the HP85 Desktop Computer which performs control and processing 3 the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive which serves as data storage Therefore within the system there exist four 4 different data acquisition subsystems one for each time regime In addition the intermediate and fast measurement subsystems were designed to use the slow measurement data acquisition elements This was to answer the request for additional monitoring of slowly changing phenomena such as temperature or humidity 3 2 1 Slow Measurement Subsystem The slow measurement subsystem was developed using the HP85 Desktop Computer the HP9895A Flexible Disk the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and the HP3437A System Voltmeter DVM These units are tied together using the software package named HP DAS Figure 3 1 shows the block diagram of the slow measurement subsystem 17 HP3497A Data Acquisition HP3437A System Voltmeter Control Unit UN MEN ME MUS SUN AU MUS AU AU A P Y MY ES 29 MD ED ME MA EXI HP85 HP9895A HP Interface Desktop Computer Flexible Disk Drive Bus HPIB Figure 3 1 Slow Measurement Subsystem The software was developed to take four 4 curves with 256 points per curve The software was designed to select a channel on the DACU This channel is transferred to the DVM Then the computer triggers the DVM and inputs the
53. T2 Return to main prog File already exist Yes notify user Purge file Yes purge amp cont No enter new name Retry storage Disk error no retry Yes notify user Re assign mass storage Clear DACU amp DVM Select 0 of 0 999 Man trg 10V rng 1s dly Close chan on DACU Set rng on DVM Let voltage settle Trigger DVM Store DVM voltage 3350 3360 3370 3380 3390 3400 3410 3420 3430 3440 3450 3460 3470 3480 3490 3500 3510 3520 3530 3540 3550 3560 3570 3580 3590 3600 3610 3620 3630 3640 3650 3660 3670 3680 3690 117 T 2 T2 TIME T 2 65 Store time T2 T2 1 Increment time index NEXT 11 RETURN REM REM REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE REM STORAGE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP What name do you want for the DISP auxiliary file INPUT Y Input aux file name IF LEN Y lt 10 THEN 3550 Name too long CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user DISP Name is too large Please choose DISP a name with less than 11 DISP letters WAIT 4500 GOTO 3450 Re enter name CLEAR BEEP No store aux data DISP DISP DISP DISP Storing data in Y ON ERROR GOTO 3690 Trap file create error CREATE Y 138 8 Create file space OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO Y Open file FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 69 PRINT 1 69 I 1 J T I d Store aux array NEXT J NEXT I ASSIGN 1 TO Close file RETURN OFF ERROR 3700 3710 3720 3730 3740 3750 3760 3770 3
54. Wait 4500 Notify user of CHALT gt Notify user of unusual error disk error 377 Notify user of Notify user name name too is too long unusual error long No Notify user data storing Wait 4500 Notify user to pick Notify user of new mass storage duplicate name Yes Is there an error Is error No Yes 63 Turn off error w 78 Assign buffer to mass storage file Store control data 1 Calculate x div Calculate y div Store controi data 2 Is there an Sort minimum and attenuator etc maximum voltage Store x data Enter conversion Store y data Wait 4500 Close buffer Is entry Notify user No valid entry incorrect there another Yes curve Compute factors 379 Do you want to Purge file name purge Notify user to enter new name Notify user name O Wait 4500 is too long Did you Is store another Yes name too Enter reg file name regular file long No No Load and run Autost 380 APPENDIX D HP 85 ERROR CODES 381 A list of the error codes which may be encountered in the operation of the system follows The error numbers and messages error conditions meanings and corrective actions are taken from the operating manuals for the HP 85 computer for the I O ROM
55. Working 1 of 1 Process 3 of 4 Storing 1 of 1 After completing the power curve the software evaluates the energy curve This is done by performing a time integral of the power product curve This is evaluated using a trapezoidal approximation discussed in the previous chapter During this process the computer displays Process 4 of 4 Reading 1 of 1 Process 4 of 4 59 Working 1 of 1 Process 4 of 4 Storing 1 of 1 After the processing is completed the software asks for a processed data file name This allows the operator to keep both an unprocessed and a processed data file Should the operator choose to store under the same name then the program will take care of purging the old file In order to store the processed data file the program asks What name do you want for the processed data file After the processing is completed and the processed file has been stored the computer displays The processing is finished Then the program is ready to process another file The program displays Would you like to process another set of curves Y N If the operator chooses to process another set of curves then the operator replies Y Then the software returns to the initialization described at the beginning of this section Otherwise the software loads and runs the program Autost MISSION CONTROL will now resume control 4 8 Summary Each of these tutorials was developed as an example of correct system operation T
56. Zeroline error B Listener left plugin Set to orig state Listener rt plugin Set to orig state Set for both curves Re initialize buffers 5500 5510 5520 5530 5540 5550 5560 5570 5580 5590 5600 5610 5620 5630 5640 5650 5660 5670 5680 5690 5700 5710 5720 5730 5740 5750 5760 5770 5780 5790 5800 5810 5820 5830 5840 138 REM CLEAR BEEP DISP Do you want to use the system DISP voltmeter to make additional DISP measurements Y N INPUT V IF V Y THEN RETURN CLEAR BEEP DISP How many channels are to be DISP monitored by voltmeter 4 max INPUT T1 Input of chan T1 IP T1 Make integer _ IF T1 gt 0 AND T1 lt 5 THEN 5670 of channels valid CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP Please choose a number from 1 DISP to 4 WAIT 4500 GOTO 5570 Re enter of channels FOR I 69 TO 70 T1 STEP 1 Yes enter chan rng CLEAR BEEP store at top of reg DISP Enter the channel number and the DISP voltage range DISP DISP 1V 1 1V 2 and 10V 3 INPUT A B Channel voltage rng A IP A B IP B Make integers IF A gt 1 AND A lt 1000 THEN 5780 Channel valid CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP Please enter a number 0 999 WAIT 4500 GOTO 5680 Re enter chan rng IF B gt 0 AND B lt 4 THEN 5820 Voltage rng valid CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP Please enter a number 1 3 WAIT 4500 GOTO 5680 Re enter chan rng FOR J
57. all of the settings correct Y N If the settings are incorrect the operator enters N and the program returns to the setup routine above Otherwise the 43 program proceeds to ask if there are any conversion processes Is an attenuator current transformer or current sensing resistor being used Y N Do not consider x10 probes Y Which of the plug ins uses one of these devices A B C C is equivalent to A and B A What is the conversion process for plug in A 2A 1V These values are used to calculate the true units from the voltages which appear at the scope After the conversion factors are entered the program proceeds with the data acquisition process by arming the time bases If only one 1 curve is being taken the program asks Which time base is to be armed A B A The program then arms the designated time base and awaits the acquisition of a good measurement The program then notifies the operator to take a measurement Time base A armed Now simply take measurement When the curve appears on the monitor press CONTINUE Once the computer finds an acquisition has been made it queries the operator Do you wish to keep this data Y N If the operator decides not to keep the data the computer will prompt Do you wish to change the settings Y N If the settings need to be changed the program will return to the 44 settings area described earlier in this section Otherwise the program will keep th
58. be discussed in this thesis was undertaken to develop a centralized data acquisition and conditioning system DACS This DACS was to answer three 3 objectives 1 develop a system which was easy to use by an operator who has minimal exposure to a computer 2 develop a system which can utilize effectively several pieces of data acquisition hardware 3 develop a system which can carry out calculations based on measurements in a timely manner In the following pages these three 3 objectives will be discussed and the system developed to implement them will be considered Chapter 2 examines more closely the needs of the laboratory and defines specific components to answer these needs This will include a discussion of the critical areas of interest present and future Chapter 3 examines the interactive subsystems developed using the specific components designated in Chapter 2 The discussion will develop a more complete analysis of the needs of laboratory at the subsystem level of interaction Chapter 4 provides the reader with a tutorial of each of the subsystems In so doing the reader is taken through each of the processes that are available at the present time The endeavor of this portion of the thesis is to illustrate to the reader the step by step processes of the system and thereby provide a working framework for any measurements which the reader may desire to make Chapter 5 provides the results of several tests undertak
59. cannot be larger than the number of vertical positions however Therefore the program can compensate for a constant value offset TABLET will repeat the previous operation for the second curve if there are two 2 curves Thus the program allows the operator to store two 2 curves on the same graph with different zero 0 locations 261 11 3 2 Data Entry TABLET will notify the operator of the key functions and will ask the operator to begin digitizing the curve During the digitizaiton process the program will accept both data for the curve and softkey or key function choices If the operator digitizes data the program will compensate the data for rotational error and stored the corrected data TABLET will continue this process until a softkey is digitized a key is pressed or the data register is full The program can store only 512 data points If the operator enters 512 points the program will notify the operator that the data register is full Then TABLET will ask whether or not the operator wishes to re enter the data The data should be re entered if the important data from the curve has not been digitized completely If the operator chooses not to re enter the data the program wil either proceed to the next curve digitization if one is necessary or notify the operator that the digitization is complete and ask for a softkey or key choice TABLET is developed to allow functional choices using either the function keys
60. clarity Yes the system is efficient and timely When compared with the analysis which was carried on prior to the development of the system the present situation is far preferable As was noted in Chapter 1 the old analysis involved graphical analysis by hand Again graphic analysis by hand is an extremely tedious and time consuming task This discussion of course is restricted to computational concerns Any analysis that requires a human eye cannot be replace by this system although this system makes analysis somewhat easier Based upon these observations the conclusion would be made that the system goals were indeed achieved Since each of the goals was achieved individually yes the system goals were achieved In fact based upon the error handling capabilities the point could be made that the system exceeds the goals A user friendly system is one which makes operation by a novice easy this system accomplishes that and in many cases notifies the user when an error has occurred and suggests a corrective course of action As far as improvement of the system there is always room for improvement There are many areas where the system can be enhanced among them 1 enhanced graphics capabilities 2 increased computational facilities and 3 advanced analysis tools including artificial intelligence Both the graphics enhancements and the increased computational power are available by interfacing between the present system and a s
61. desired bit is not set then return 1810 OUTPUT 706 BS If desired bit is set then ask for data 1820 IF Bl 3 THEN 1850 Point 1830 ENTER 706 T 1 No get softkey 1840 GOTO 1860 1850 ENTER 706 T 1 T 2 T 3 Yes get point 1860 OUTPUT 706 PS Send tone s 1870 RETURN 1880 REM 1890 REM 1900 REM SET UP SUBROUTINE 1910 REM A ROTATION FACTORS 1920 REM B GRID FACTORS 1930 REM 1940 REM 1950 V1 SQR U 3 U 4 2 V 3 V 4 2 Lower boundary length 1960 U1 ATN V 4 V 3 U 4 U 3 Rotation wrt tablet 1970 U 4 U 3 IP V1 5 Correct x lower RH 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 V 4 V 3 V1 SOR U 1 U 3 2 V 1 V 3 2 U 1 U 3 V 1 V 3 1P V1 5 U 2 U 4 V 2 V 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP How many horizontal divisions DISP are there INPUT P 3 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP How many vertical divisions DISP are there INPUT P 3 2 P 1 3 DATE P 2 3 TIME FOR I 1 TO Q CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the value per horizontal DISP division for curve VALS I 2 DISP DISP Enter value and unit for DISP example 5ms 5E 3 s INPUT P I 1 A CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the value per vertical DISP division for curve VALS I DISP DI
62. devices the HP Graphics Tablet s time resolution can be expressed in terms of the accuracy associated with the physical digitization process The HP Graphics Tablet has error terms of one 1 part in 12032 and one 1 part in 8710 for a digitizing area that is 301 mm by 218 mm respectively The associated error terms are subsets of this digitizing area Thus for an oscilloscope trace captured on film with a standard format of ten 10 divisions by eight 8 divisions with 1 cm per division the error terms are approximately one 1 part in 4000 of the full scale magnitude in the x direction and one 1 part in 3200 of the full scale magnitude in the y direction In conventional use the time data corresponds to the x direction Therefore the error term is one 1 part in 4000 of the total time for a standard oscilloscope trace In general the error term is given by At ttot 12032 Xtot 301 7 where ttot is the total time and Xto is the total length of the data set along its x axis in millimeters 2 3 2 Computational Accuracy The steps involved in converting raw voltage and current data to completely processed energy data are 1 scalar multiplication for conversion from binary format to decimal format 2 multiplication of voltage and current to calculate instantaneous power and 3 time integration of instantaneous power curve to generate energy data The voltage and current data can be defined in the following manner Vmb Vb i
63. element they can all but eliminate the first three 3 problem areas After all with proper ventilation and with well conditioned power no large power 3 transients and adequate capacity a computer can run for an indefinite time The same cannot be said of humans Besides with the aid of the computer in the laboratory a human can focus on other areas of interest Based on the premise of removing as much human error as possible while addressing the needs to acquire and to store data as effectively as possible the Solid State Electronics Laboratory in the Department of Electrical Engineering at Texas Tech University under the direction of Dr W M Portnoy chose to develop such a data acquisition and conditioning system In addition to the broader problems noted previously the graduate students in the laboratory especially in the study of second breakdown characteristics of semiconductors found the volumes of data generated in the experiments difficult to process In the experiments measurements of voltage and current were taken From these measurements the values for power and energy were calculated Without the aid of a computer the students were faced with the arduous task of reducing the data by hand At best the graphical analysis techniques were inaccurate and time consuming Thus large amounts of data could be taken and stockpiled though little could be reduced to useful data never in a timely manner Therefore the work to
64. equipment available for measurement Press key for desired equipment K1 Tektronix 7612D Digitizer K2 Nicolet Digital O scope K3 HP Multiplexer amp Voltmeter K4 HP Graphics Tablet The computer then branches to the proper portion of the program to check the availability of the subsystem If the Tektronix 7612D is chosen the operator is asked Do you want to use the 7612D as a normal O scope or a one shot storage scope NORM SINGLE The computer first polls the network to see if the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive are on line Then if the operator has chosen to use the 7612D as a single shot storage scope the computer asks 31 Do you want to use the system voltmeter to make additional readings Y N If the operator chooses to use the system voltmeter the software polls the network to see if the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit and the HP3437A System Voltmeter are available as well Once all of the components are found to be available the software loads and runs the desired program If the 7612D is used as single shot storage scope the program 7612D discussed in Appendix C Chapter 7 is loaded and run otherwise the program NORML discussed in Appendix C Chapter 6 is loaded and run If the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope is chosen the program polls the network to see if the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope and the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive are available
65. files To protect the system programs the HP85 Desktop Computer s file security system The command to secure a file is SECURE file name security code security type where the file name and security code are alphanumeric strings and the security type is a number The security types which are available from the computer and the type of security which they provide are 0 inhibits LIST PLIST and all editing 1 inhibits LIST PLIST STORE duplication and all editing 2 inhibits STORE overwriting PRINT and STOREBIN and 3 inhibits CAT a blank appears where the file name should be The latter three 3 of these codes are used in the security of the system program codes At present all of the system programs are coded against duplication editing and overwriting The protection codes used are listed in the program named KEY as follows 10 REM 20 REM MAGICIAN S KEY 30 REM wee een 40 REM SECURE CODES 50 REM 60 REM KEY WZ 2 amp 3 70 REM Autost WZ 1 amp 2 80 REM NORML CG 1 amp 2 90 REM 7612D CG 1 amp 2 100 REM VMAUX CG 1 amp 2 110 REM HP DAS CG 1 amp 2 120 REM NIC85 CG 1 amp 2 130 REM TABLET CG 1 amp 2 140 REM MATH CM 1 amp 2 150 REM PLOT CM 1 amp 2 160 REM I v CM 1 amp 2 170 REM 180 END 213 This program documents all of the security codes and security types associated with each of the program files However th
66. for move 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 IF D lt 1 THEN 2180 GOSUB 2220 GOTO 2190 GOSUB 2390 GOSUB 2570 GOSUB 2760 RETURN REM REM REM DIVISION SUBROUTINE REM 1 10 3 DIVISION REM FOR FNA REM E 0 FOR F 1 TO 5 D D 1000 IF D lt 1 THEN 2340 E E 1 NEXT F D D 1000 FOR F 1 TO E WS k GWS C1 C1 1000 NEXT F RETURN REM REM REM MULTIPLICATION REM SUBROUTINE REM 1 10 3 MULTIPLY REM FOR FNA REM REM E 0 FOR F 1 TO 5 D D 1000 187 Value less than 1 No division routine Yes multiply routine Rounding routine Units routine Divide by 103 calculate engr units Increment engr ind Change units to reflect change in number Multiply by 103 calculate engr units 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 2630 2640 2650 2660 2670 2680 2690 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 2750 2760 2770 2780 2790 2800 2810 2820 2830 2840 E E 1 IF D gt 1 THEN 2530 NEXT F FOR F 1 TO E WS m EWS C1 C1 1000 NEXT F RETURN REM REM REM TESTA SUBROUTINE REM 1 TEST FOR FNA REM REM IF D gt 1 AND D lt 2 THEN D 2 IF D gt 2 AND D lt 25 THEN D 25 IF D gt 25 AND D lt 5 THEN D 5 IF D gt 5
67. if there are stuck bits again the monotonicity of the waveform will be destroyed However stuck bits will effect the monotonicity of the curve in a manner different from the non linearity errors Stuck bits can be characterized in one 1 of two 2 possible patterns 1 sporadic and 2 continuous A sporadically stuck bit will be seen as isolated points where the waveform is no longer monotonic This will be easily detectable since the values will not necessarily be consistent In fact the error associated with a sporadically stuck bit could also be explained as unwanted noise on the signal channel However if this noise does not occur in all of the measurements one could argue that the error is due to the digitizer rather than the source Each continuously stuck bit will prevent one 1 in every 2 codes from being written for an n bit ADC For d stuck bits an n bit ADC will be able to generate 2 4 unique codes Thus an 8 bit ADC will be able to develop 128 possible codes instead of 256 codes if there is one 1 stuck bit 2 2 3 Errors in Direct Conversion A D Processes As noted at the end of section 5 2 1 the manner in which the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer 7612D acquires digital information removes the susceptability of the device to many of the errors mentioned in section 5 2 1 As such the only anticipated error arises from a problem with stuck bits Again quantizing error and offset error are either insignificant or cor
68. in properly Finally check the switch settings on the interface Someone might have changed them last weekend Error 125 126 BUFFER Error Condition The primary address specified is improper Only addresses 00 thru 31 are allowed but not all interfaces use this entire range Four possible buffer problems 1 The string variable specified has not been declared as an IOBUFFER 2 Attempting to ENTER from a buffer which is out of data 3 Attempting to OUTPUT to a buffer which is already full 4 Attempting an output TRANSFER with an empty buffer 394 Possible Corrective Action Be sure that the ADDR primary address is within the proper range Pay special attention to variables that are used to hold addresses or device selectors Be sure that you have included the necessary IOBUFFER statement Check the logical flow of your program in what order are the statements executed Buffer contents can be examined at any time by simply printing or diplaying the string variable being used as the buffer If this doesn t provide enough information the buffer pointers can be examined with the STATUS statement Error Number amp Code 127 NUMBER 128 EARLY TERM Error Condition An incoming character sequence does not constitute a valid number or a number being output requires three exponent digits and an e format was specified A buffer was emptied before all the ENTER fi
69. is write protected HP 83 Not used HP 85 Attempting to store more than 42 files on a tape HP 83 Not used HP 85 Cartridge is out when attempting a tape operation Duplicate file name Attempting to access an empty program file HP 83 HP 85 Not used Tape run off or tape is full Attempting to READ PRINT to a closed file A warning is issued for attempting to close a closed file Name does not exist or name not in quotes File type mismatch Attempting to treat program file as data file or vice versa Attempting to treat binary program as BASIC program or vice versa Attempting to treat data as binary program or vice versa Attempting to access beyond existing number of bytes in logical record using random file access System cannot read mass storage medium 398 Error Number amp Cod E Condit 71 End of file EOF 72 Record RECORD Attempting to access a record that doesn t exist Attempting to READ PRINT at the end of file Lost in record close file to release the buffer 73 HP 83 Not used SEARCH HP 85 Bad tape cartridge or tape not initialized 74 HP 83 Attempting to use non existent tape drive STALL HP 85 Tape is stalled 75 HP 83 Not used NOT HP 85 FILE 110 I O CARD 111 IOP 112 M S ROM 123 DISC ONLY 124 FILES 125 VOLUME 126 MSUS 127 READ VFY 128 FULL HP 85 Not an HP 85 file cannot read The I O card failed self test and requires service
70. measurement This process is carried out at operator selected intervals The operator chooses a sampling interval from 2 seconds to 27 775 minutes The maximum delay is limited by the DACU while the minimum delay is limited by the DVM As pointed out in section 2 2 1 the DACU can sample as quickly as once every 100 milliseconds However the software was designed with the premise that more than one 1 channel would be monitored Since approximately 5 second is needed for a voltage to settle once channels are changed the software was written with a 5 second delay between readings This practice is to insure an accurate reading for each sample The data acquisition proceeds for a period selected by the operator For example the operator can take measurements every 5 seconds over a period of 3 minutes 36 samples will be taken Since the program can store 256 points the operator has a limit on the size of period for the 18 measurements Thus if the operator chooses a S second sample time the operator can continue the process a maximum of 21 minutes 20 seconds The data acquired by the computer is a voltage Thus when the data acquisition is completed the computer will ask for any conversion factors in the process This is to allow the operator to condition the data to reflect the measurement of interest e g current prior to storage After the conversion factor is entered the computer stores the conditioned data in the chosen mas
71. mentioned options are available to the operator however the graphics subroutine is not operational Therefore if the operator chooses to use the graphics capabilities the message appears This program is not operational Please choose another function In the following sections the software controlling each of the subsystems is described in a tutorial setting This is provided to allow the operator a closer look at the interaction between human and software 4 2 Slow Measurement Subsystem Tutorial When the operator chooses to use the slow measurement subsystem the program HP DAS is loaded and run First the program displays the message Initializing then proceeds to set the default values for variables in the program and initializes the data registers Then the software asks How many channels are to be monitored by voltmeter 4 max The operator enters the number of channels to be monitored 2 The operator then responds to the request Enter the channel number and the voltage range 1v 1 1V 2 10V 3 by entering the value 1 This is then followed by a request for the time sample information Enter the time between samples There will automatically be a 2 second delay between groups 33 of measurements M ninutes seconds Separate number from unit with a comma Ex 30 8 This is responded to with the value 45 which sets the sample rate to once every 45 seconds The software then requ
72. minutes 670 DISP Re enter with a smaller number 680 WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 500 Re enter delay time 690 CLEAR BEEP 700 DISP Enter the total time over which 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 DISP to take samples 99 VALS 256 A A DISP DISP Seperate number from unit with DISP a comma INPUT B BS IF B M OR B S THEN 790 CLEAR BEEP DISP Re enter with correct units WAIT 4500 GOTO 690 T2 B 1000 IF B M THEN T2 T2 60 IF T2 T1 lt 256 THEN 860 CLEAR BEEP DISP Not enough room Enter smaller DISP number WAIT 4500 GOTO 690 T2 1P T2 T1 CLEAR 709 CLEAR 724 OUTPUT 709 AFOAL999ACO OUTPUT 724 T3R3D 1S T 1 DATE T 2 TIME FOR I 1 TO T2 CLEAR BEEP DISP Taking data GOSUB 1630 CLEAR BEEP DISP Waiting WAIT T1 NEXT I CLEAR BEEP DISP The data is stored DISP DISP Press K1 to continue program ON KEY 1 CONT GOTO 1050 KEY LABEL BEEP 10 700 BEEP 9 700 Q GOTO 1040 OFF KEY 1 Input sample time Units valid No notify user Re enter sample time Convert s to ms Finish for m to ms Enough room No notify user t Re enter sample time Yes make integer Clear DACU DVM Select 0 of 0 999 Man trg 10V rng 1s dly Set start time date Get dat
73. of 1 If the operator chooses to do so the software will change the scale of the plots In so doing the operator is allowed to control the size of the plot Enter the scale factor for Plotting less than 2 25 Once the operator is prepared to proceed to another set of curves the software prompts What is the new file name To this the operator responds TRNTST and the software begins operations again at the initialization process outlined in the beginning of this section 57 When the operator is finished the software loads and runs the program Autost MISSION CONTROL will now resume control 4 7 Mathematical Processing Subsystem Tutorial When the operator chooses to process data acquired in the earlier processes the program MATH is loaded and run First the program displays the message Initializing Unless MATH is the first program to be called after applying power to the system the name of the last file to be processed is passed to the program Therefore the software asks first Where is TABTST stored TAPE DISKO00 DISKO01 To this the operator responds DISK00 The program then reads in the maximum and minimum time for each of the curves to be processed These values are used to define the time frame over which the power product and energy product time integral will be evaluated This is denoted by the message Sorting Having calculated the time frame over which the curves will be evaluated the program
74. of curves will be digitized First however the program checks to see if the operator has stored the present curves Have you stored the present set of curves Y N Then the program asks if another set of curves will be digitized Do you wish to digitize another set of curves Y N If the operator chooses to digitize another set of curves the reply is 50 entered Y and the program returns to the initialization process mentioned at the beginning of this section Otherwise the program proceeds to load and run the program Autost In that case the software displays MISSION CONTROL will now resume control On the other hand if the operator chooses to print the device data then the program proceeds to enter and print the device data For the device data discussion only the computer requests and the hardcopy output sent to the thermal printer use the indicated fonts Enter manufacturer Manufacturer UNITRODE Enter device type Device type BUX98 Enter mask type or other applicable data Mask type or other applicable data NH LOT 5 Enter device number Device number 037 Enter temperature RT or degrees C Temperature RT C Enter SB type N A B or C SB type C Enter forward base current Forward base current 20 A Enter nominal reverse base current Reverse base current Nominal 1 A Enter reverse base current at SB Actual at SB 1 A 51 Enter any additional comments Comments After produc
75. of paper Otherwise the operator enters N and the software uses the default configuration which plots the curves so that all four 4 can be plotted on a single piece of paper The software then proceeds to ask for the axis titles which the operator desires What title do you want for the time axis of this current vs time curve TIME What title do you want for the current axis of this current vs time curve Ic The program also has the ability to plot the curve on either a grid or an open graph Thus the software queries the operator as to a preference for grid or graph Do you want a grid or graph To this the operator responds GRID The program then is ready to plot the curve Thus the software notifies the operator Load plotter and press CONTINUE Once the plotter is loaded the operator presses CONTINUE and the program carries out the plotting In so doing the software scans the data file for maximum and minimum values to automatically scale the size of the axis and read the data into memory 1024 points at a time Scanning Reading 1 of 1 The program then plots the curve After completing the plot the software asks the operator for the final quantities to complete the 53 plot Enter the y coordinate for the date and time 8 Enter the year 1985 1985 Enter the label for this graph Maximum length of 40 char Collector Current Enter the y coordinate for the label of this graph 7 After completin
76. or an open graph 180 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM I vs V PACKAGE 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 11 20 84 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 REM Chuck Graves wizard REM REM COM X 10 Make file name common SHORT X 2048 2048 P 3 5 DIM A 40 GOSUB 3010 Initialization routine IF X NULL THEN 200 I v first program CLEAR BEEP Yes input file name DISP What is the name of the file INPUT X IF LEN X gt 10 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Q WAIT 4500 GOTO 160 If name is too long notify user and re enter file name CLEAR BEEP OFF ERROR DISP Where is X stored DISP TAPE DISK00 DISKO01 INPUT R Input mass storage GOSUB 610 Mass storage routine ASSIGN 1 TO X Open file READ 1 1 Pl Read of curves IF P1 lt 4 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Must be processed first WAIT 4500 GOTO 160 If file not processed notify user and re enter file name READ 1 2 P 3 1 Read horiz div READ 1 3 P 3 2 Read vertical div K 6 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 FOR I TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 5 READ 1 K P I J K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I O K 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP
77. program will ask for a new file name With a new file name the program will try to create a file again The second common error arises from a problem with the mass storage device Typically the problem arises from telling YMAUX to create a file on a mass storage device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage and return to the beginning of the data storage process On rare occasions other errors may arise If this occurs VMAUX will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 12 3 2 True Unit Computation Once VMAUX has created a file the program stores a portion of the control file Then the program asks whether or not a device other than a voltage probe is used If so VMAUX asks for the particular conversion process on a given curve Unlike the processes outlined in Chapters 8 and 9 VMAUX will accept processes other then voltage to voltage and current to voltage However the process must be quantity to voltage i e the voltage entry must be the right hand entry As was the case with 7612D and NIC85 VMAUX was written to accept numeric pairs and calculate a conversion coefficient for multiplicative conversion processes Also like NIC85 the operator needs to enter multiplying probes such as a 10x probe 12 3 3 Normal Storage Operations After t
78. subsystem Timeout error Trap timeout error Set values for disk Check for device Set values for Nicolet Check for device Chk aux measurements Load Nicolet prog Set timeout branch 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 IF A 700 THEN 1100 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 ASSIGN 1 TO RETURN OUTPUT A 1 D4 ENTER A USING K C1 C2 RETURN DISP The A is OFF Turn DISP ON the AS and press DISP CONTINUE RESET 7 PAUSE GOTO 980 IF ERRN 131 THEN 1130 RETURN REM REM REM HP3497A SYSTEM REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ON ERROR GOSUB 1390 CLEAR BEEP A 700 A disk drive ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 1340 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 ASSIGN 1 TO GOSUB 2470 OFF ERROR CHAIN HP DAS D700 DISP The A is OFF Turn DISP ON the A and press DISP CONTINUE PAUSE RESET 7 GOTO 1270 IF ERRN 131 THEN 1340 RETURN 90 Not disk drive Open dummy file Close dummy file Address Nicolet Accept Nicolet response Notify user of timeout and ask for corrective actions Reset HPIB Retry to find subsystem Timeout error Trap timeout error Set values for disk Set timeout branch Open dummy file Close dummy file Chk aux measurements Load DACU VM prog Notify user of timeout and ask for corrective ac
79. system efficient and timely 2 How can the system be improved In order to answer the initial question the second third and fourth must be answered first Yes the system is flexible As shown clearly in Chapter 4 the system can acquire data from a plethora of digital data takers The system controls data takers which are capable of sampling from once every 27 775 minutes to once every 5 nanoseconds These measurements are taken directly In addition the system has the capability to enter data by hand The resolution of this method is limited only by the technology available at the time Also the system can store any data entered The data then can be retrieved at any future time The system includes programs to perform preliminary data reduction and conditioning and to generate hardcopy plots of the data Therefore the system seems to be quite flexible Yes the system is user friendly The system software was developed so that the interaction between the operator and the computer is clearly defined The programs include thorough error handling structure This prevents the system from halting in the middle of an operation due to 81 simple human error In addition many of the operations which the system carries out are restricted to menu selections By using menus and restricting interactive decisions to yes no selections much of the human error was effectively negated Also the choices posed to the operator were carefully phrased for
80. the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and the HP Graphics Tablet perform with accuracies equivalent to the manufacturers specifications 1 12 bits for the HP System Voltmeter and the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and 2 1 mm for the HP Graphics Tablet The Tektronix Programmable Digitzer however is susceptible to error These errors occur at a rate of approximately one 1 in every 64 operations This reduces the accuracy of the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer to seven 7 bits for a sampling period of 50 ns 78 In addition to the errors associated with data acquisition data processing produces errors Many of these errors are exagerations of the data acquisition errors The particular algorithms were analyzed and the error terms were calculated In this manner the final accuracy of the system was analyzed according to the quantity of interest and the system component This analysis showed that the values for second breakdown processing are accurate as represented for the HP System Voltmeter the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and the HP Graphics Tablet However the analysis also showed that the representations produced using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer are less accurate and the lesser accuracies should be noted carefully when using the component CHAPTER 6 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS In Chapter 1 the need for a data acquisition and conditioning system was identified at the Solid State Electronics Laboratory in the Departme
81. the area of a rectangle Using the values given in Figure 4 1 the triangular area is given by Ap 5 Xj 1 7 Xi Yi 17 Yi 231 and the rectangular area is given by Ar Yi Xi41 Xy X i rYi 1 Figure 4 1 Trapezoidal Approximation Taking the sun A 5Yi47 SYi Yi Xi41 Xi A 5Yi47 5Y3 Xi 1 Xi A 5 Yi41 Yi Xi 1 gt Xi This value is added to the previous area to evaluate an approximate value for the time integral 4 4 Storage MATH stores all these curves in a new file After the program has completed storing the operator is prompted to enter a name for the new file If the old name is entered the program will purge the old file Therefore if the operator wishes to keep the old unprocessed file the operator will need to enter a different file name for the processed file 232 4 5 Completion Finally MATH will ask whether or not the operator wishes to process a new file If so the program will load the new file and start again Otherwise the program will return to Autost 4 6 Reference A complete outline of MATH is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 292 through 298 A 233 CHAPTER 5 PLOTTING PACKAGE a l Overview The SYSTEMS package contains a program PLOT which plots any curve stored by the system The program is designed to read and plot both processed and unprocessed curves with four 4 curves on an 8 5 x 11 piece of paper Therefore PLOT defaults to a p
82. the computer probably has experienced hardware failure At this point refer to the service section of the user s manual for the HP 85 The manual has a list of actions to locate and remedy hardware errors 3 8 Normal Operations Once the computer has located all the desired equipment on the HPIB the program will load and run the program which carries out the desired function using the necessary equipment Based upon the operator s selection Autost will load and run one 1 of the following programs 1 take data using a Tektronix 7612D as normal o scope NORML b Tektronix 7612D as one shot o scope 7612D c Nicolet Digital O scope NIC85 d HP Multiplexer and Voltmeter HP DAS e HP Graphics Tablet TABLET 2 process data MATH 3 plot curves PLOT 4 plot I vs V only I V 5 use graphics not functional 3 9 Reference A complete outline of Autost is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 279 through 290 229 CHAPTER 4 MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING PACKAGE 4 1 Overview In addition to taking data covered in Chapter 7 through Chapter 11 the systems package contains programs to calculate the product and the time integral of two 2 curves Each pair of curves needs to have a voltage and a current curve Otherwise the processing program MATH cannot and will not work on them To process the pair of curves simply select process data when in Autost When the computer has loaded and begun running MATH the operator will be p
83. time Store time div A Store time B Yes Store to next bkpt Calculate time A beginning index for present sampling time B time at end of last sample time period offset time D 2 I present sampling time for timebase B 135 4640 PRINT 1 K X Store time B 4650 K K 1 4660 IF FP J 1 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB 5930 Take desired auxiliary measurement if n 256th operation 4670 NEXT J 4680 A D 1 1 1 1 Set new start index 4690 B X Set new offset time 4700 NEXT I 4710 IF W B THEN PRINT 1 6 X 10 Store time per division for timebase B in single operation 4720 IF W C THEN PRINT 1 11 X 10 Store time per division for timebase B in dual operation 4730 IF WS B THEN 4810 Store voltage A 4740 FOR I 1 TO LEN D1 3 Yes 4750 Y NUM D1 I 1I 2Z0 P 1 2 8 255 Convert 8 bit ASCII characters into voltage values D1 I I ASCII character from curve A Z0 zeroline offset error for curve A P 1 2 timebase A voltage per division Values in D1 vary from 0 to 255 4760 PRINT 1 K Y Store voltage A 4770 K K 1 4780 IF FP I 1 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB 5930 Take desired auxiliary measurement if n 256th operation 4790 NEXT I 4800 IF W A THEN 4870 Store voltage B 4810 FOR I 1 TO LEN D2 3 Yes 4820 Y NUM D2 I 1I 21 P 2 2 8 255 Convert 8 bit ASCII characters into voltage values D2 1 1 ASCII character from curve B Z1 zer
84. to allow the voltages to settle on the channels This limits the minimum sample period to 2 s or 30 sample sets per minute In addition HP DAS operates in much the same manner as the auxiliary voltage measurements mentioned in Chapters 8 and 9 This program however does not require the reformatting capabilities of YMAUX Instead HP DAS stores all data in the standard format 10 2 Main Program Setup After initializing all the registers HP DAS will ask the operator for the number of channels to be monitored by the system multiplexer The program can monitor as many as four 4 channels If the operator 255 enters a number not on the range one 1 to four 4 the program will ask for a valid entry When HP DAS receives a valid entry the program will ask for the system multiplexer channel number and the system voltmeter voltage range for the measurement The channel number is a number on the range zero 0 to 999 The voltage range sets the maximum voltage the voltmeter can read The three 3 voltage ranges are 1 volt 1 volt and 10 volts After each entry the program will verify whether 1 the entry is valid i e valid channel number and valid voltage range 2 the entry is new i e HP DAS will notify the operator if a channel number has been entered previously HP DAS asks the operator for the sample interval This interval is limited to a maximum of 27 775 minutes and must be labeled as minutes or seconds If either the e
85. upr cntr CSIZE H 100 10 16 5 Set char size MOVE IP G U 9 SGN G 1 P 3 2 2 U IP C V 9 SGN C 2 V LABEL U U1 Plot horiz label DEG LDIR 90 LORG 4 Setup vert label MOVE IP G U 9 SGN G 2 LEN VALS V 1 25 U IP C V 9 SGN C 1 P 3 2 2 V LABEL V V1 Plot vert label LDIR 0 Reset orientation GOTO 410 Return main prog REM 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 REM REM READ amp DRAW REM SUBROUTINE REM 1 READS PLOT REM 2 DRAW PLOT REM REM M 13 I 1 P 1 4 IF I 2 THEN M 13 P 1 4 0 2047 IF J Q THEN S P 1 4 FOR L 0 TO S READ 1 M L X L 0 1 NEXT L M 13 K 1 P 1 4 IF I 2 THEN M 13 3 P 1 4 FOR L 0 TO S READ 1 M L Y L O 1 NEXT L FOR L 1 TO S O 1 PLOT X0 X L YO Y L B B 1 NEXT L O 0 L 1 IF J Q THEN B 1 RETURN REM REM REM FUNCTION FNA REM 1 MAKES LABELS REM 2 ROUNDS TO ENGR REM UNITS REM REM E 0 186 First value volt crv 1 First value volt crv 2 Last value last value last read Read voltage value 18t value current crv 1 18t value current crv 2 Read current value Plot value move if 15St Set for plot not move Set start for next read Last read set
86. user file too long name is too long No Enter mass storage 12 3 Notify user program cannot process 2 curves of same type Are Are there two both curves Yes the same curves No Do you want curves stored separately Yes Set separate flag Store x data Store control register s 369 Notify user curve 1 stored first to file Notify user 12 2 Assign buffer to data storing mass storage file Ap Ye No there an error 370 O Notify user to pick Is ls new mass storage BRN No error Yes 63 130 Yes No Notify user of Notify user of duplicate name unusual error Purge duplicate you want to purge file from storage 2 Notify user to enter new file name 371 separate flag there another set curve Notify user data is stored Enter manufacturer Print manufacturer Enter device type Print device type Enter mask type Print mask type Enter device number Print device number Enter nominal reverse base current Print fwd base current Enter fwd base current Print 2nd breakdown type Enter 2nd breakdown type Print temperature Enter temperature 372 Print nominal reverse base current Enter 2nd breakdown reverse base current Print 2nd breakdown reverse base current Ent
87. verified If the input is invalid the program will notify the operator to enter a valid input The program the proceeds based upon the valid entry Whenever the program offers a list of key assignments the operator only need press the key assigned to initiate a given operation Note The keys referred to are those marked K1 through K10 just above the Standard typewriter keyboard area The keyed responses are used wherever there are more than two 2 choices Only those keys listed in the program prompt are active If the operator presses a key which is inactive the machine will generate an error stating the key is not assigned This error will not cause the program to fail If the program stops with an unassigned key error press CONTINUE and press a key with an assignment 226 2 3 Initialization The first operation which Autost carries out is initialization of the system clock and calendar If the operator has just powered up the system the program will ask for the date After receiving a valid date the system will ask for the time of day The program then sets the computer s clock and calendar Once the system is initialized the program proceeds to the next operation 3 4 Main Program The program lists the functions which the system is capable of carrying out 1 take data depress K1 2 process data depress K2 3 plot curves depress K3 4 plot I vs V only depress K4 5 use graphics depress K5 3 5 pat A isiti
88. will translate for an attenuator or multiplying probe as well as converting a voltage to a current knowing the current probe conversion or current sensing resistor value The true unit readings are the values stored in the file 8 2 Main Program Setup After initializing all the registers 7612D will ask the operator for the number of curves to be stored The program will store up to two 2 curves If the operator does not enter one 1 or two 2 the 241 program will prompt the operator for a correct entry After receiving a correct entry 2612D will ask the operator if a repetitive set of measurements is desired In this case repetitive refers to whether or not a set of measurements will be taken with the same settings Thus if the operator wishes to take a set of measurements using one 1 set of instrument settings the program will not go back to the setting entry after each measurement Instead the program will default to the previous settings and continue 8 2 1 Voltmeter Setup Next 7612D will ask whether or not the operator wishes to take additional measurements using the system voltmeter If not the program will proceed with the baseline orientation section 8 2 2 Otherwise the program will ask for the number of channels to be monitored by the HP DAS Control Unit referred to as the system multiplexer The program is designed to store a maximum of four 4 channels Once the operator has entered a valid entry
89. 0 GOTO 2320 2390 CLEAR BEEP 2400 DISP Are all of the settings correct 2410 DISP Y N 2420 INPUT Q 2430 C 1 A1 1 A4 D 1 B1 1 B4 2440 GOSUB 5060 2450 RETURN 2460 REM 2470 REM 2480 REM 2490 REM 2500 REM 2510 REM 2520 REM 2530 L 1 2540 FOR I 1 TO A 2550 B POS WS 2560 W1 WS 1 B 1 2570 WS WS B 1 LEN WS AS A CHECK 2580 IF I 2 OR LEN W1 lt 12 THEN 2820 2590 B POS W1 2600 W2 W1 1 B 2610 W1 W1 B 1 LEN W1 2620 BO POS W1 2630 W2 W2 amp W1 1 B0 1 2640 W1 W1S B0 1 LEN W1 2650 DISP G amp W2S 2660 FOR J 1 TO N 1 2670 B POS W1 2680 W2 W1 1 B 2690 W1 W1 B 1 LEN W1 DECOMPOSITION SUBROUTINE 1 DECOMPOSE STRING B 128 Another timebase info Repeat process Settings correct Last bkpt file size Zeroline correction Find A substrings Posn substring Assign substring Shorten workspace Entry multiple bkpts Yes posn lst bkpt Assign substring Shorten workspace Posn lst bkpt smpl time Concat substrings Shorten workspace Disp lst bkpt smpl tm Posn next bkpt Assign substring Shorten workspace 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 2750 2760 2770 2780 2790 2800 2810 2820 2830 2840 2850 2860 2870 2880 2890 2900 2910 2920 2930 2940 2950 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 129 BO POS W1 Posn next bkpt smpl tm IF BO 0 THEN W2 W2 W1 GOTO 2730
90. 0 IF W A THEN D1 D Store timebase A data 3160 D2 D Store timebase B data 3170 IF W A AND A 2 THEN W B D GOTO 3110 If another curve set values and repeat data transfer process 3180 IF A 2 OR WS A THEN D1 D1 5 LEN D1 1 P 1 1 1 Get rid of leading info not data for timebase A 3190 IF A 2 OR WS B THEN D2 D2 5 LEN D2 1 P 2 1 1 Get rid of leading info not data for timebase B 3200 IF A 2 THEN W C 3210 RETURN 3220 REM 3230 REM 3240 REM INITIALIZATION 3250 REM SUBROUTINE 3260 REM 3270 REM 3280 P1 1 3290 SEND 7 CMD SPE UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 t Config 7612D for poll 3300 Q SPOLL 7 t Serial poll 7612D 3310 FOR I 1 TO 2 3320 FOR J 1 TO 5 3330 P I J 0 Initialize cntl reg 3340 NEXT J 3350 FOR J 1 TO 15 3360 C I J 2048 Initialize A bkpt reg 131 3370 D I J 2048 Initialize B bkpt reg 3380 NEXT J 3390 NEXT I 3400 FOR I 1 TO 69 3410 T 1 1 9999 T 2 1 9999 Initialize aux reg 3420 NEXT I 3430 IOBUFFER D Initialize I O buffer 3440 L 1 M 1 N 1 O 1 Default disp count A scale B scale time scale 3450 R D700 Default mass storage 3460 A 1 B 1 P 1 5 86 P 2 5 86 Default positions A amp B and default units V 3470 C Yy C1 0 1 C store identical curve types separately C1 curves are not identical type 3480 RETURN 3490 REM 3500 REM 3510 REM SCALING SUBROUTINE 3520 REM 1 SCALE INPUT FOR 3530 REM TRANSFORM
91. 0 PRINT 2 5 P 2 3 Store time 1040 K 6 1050 FOR I 1 TO 2 1060 FOR J 1 TO 5 1070 PRINT 2 K P I J Store control registers 1080 K K 1 1090 NEXT J 1100 NEXT I 1110 O K 1 1120 GOSUB 2810 Store routine store x 1130 K 1 Q Q1 S1 R 1 1 Tl P 1 4 P 2 4 P 3 5 1 Set values K process number 1 interpolation curve 1 Q number of read passes S1 start index curve 1 T1 offset for reading magnitude P 3 5 workspace index 1140 FOR I 1 TO Q 1150 CLEAR BEEP 1160 DISP Process K of 4 1170 DISP Reading I of Q 1180 GOSUB 2610 Read subroutine 1190 CLEAR BEEP 1200 DISP Process K of 4 1210 DISP Working I of Q 1220 GOSUB 1810 Interpolation routine 1230 CLEAR BEEP 1240 DISP Process K of 4 1250 DISP Storing I of Q 1260 GOSUB 2810 Storage routine 1270 NEXT I 1280 IF K 1 THEN 1310 Curve 2 interpolated 1290 K 2 Q Q2 S1 R 2 1 P 3 5 1 No set values K process number 2 interpolation curve 2 Q number of read passes S1 start index curve 2 P 3 5 workspace index 196 1300 GOTO 1140 Interpolate curve 2 1310 ASSIGN 1 TO Yes close old file 1320 ASSIGN 1 TO TEMPX Open new file for read 1330 Q3 IP P 3 3 256 1 Q3 of reads inter 1340 IF Q3 P 3 3 256 1 THEN Q3 Q3 1 Allow for integer Q3 1350 K 3 Q Q3 S1 16 P 3 3 T1 P 3 3 Set values K process number 3 multiply intrp curves
92. 0 PRINT current at To is VALS A AS 2750 PRINT 2760 READ 1 13 3 P 1 4 J A Read power 172 2770 WS W D A GOSUB 3290 A D A W Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded power at 10 of 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded power at 10 of 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2780 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2790 PRINT power at To is VALS A AS 2800 PRINT 2810 READ 1 13 4 P 1 4 J A Read energy 2820 W J D A GOSUB 3290 A D A W Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded energy at 10 of 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded energy at 10 of 2nd bkdn A returns as rounded units 2830 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2840 PRINT energy at To is VALS A AS 2850 PRINT PRINT 2860 READ 1 13 I A Read 294 bkdn time 2870 READ 1 13 J B Read 10 20d bkdn time 2880 WS s D A B GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded time from 10 to 2nd pkdn D returns as rounded time from 10 to 294 bkdn A returns as rounded units 2890 PRINT The time from To to 2900 PRINT 2nd breakdown is VAL A A 2910 PRINT 2920 READ 1 13 4 P 1 4 I A 2930 READ 1 13 4 P 1 4 J B 2940 W J D A B GOSUB 3290 A D AS W Set values for rounding routine W unrounded units A unrounded energy change from 10 to 2nd bkdn D returns as rou
93. 00 GOTO 370 If not processed data file notify user amp return to main prog 1030 I 1 K 5 K energy L 4 I position of time array in file for energy curve K position of energy array in file K type of curve L curve position index 1040 GOTO 1060 Proceed with plotting 165 1050 IF P THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Must be processed first WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If not processed data file notify user amp return to main prog 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 GOSUB 4430 CLEAR BEEP DISP What title do you want for the DISP I axis of this DISP K vs I curve INPUT US i IF LEN U gt 25 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP characters WAIT 4500 GOTO 1070 If title is too long notify user and CLEAR BEEP DISP What title do you want for the DISP KS axis of this DISP K vs I curve INPUT V IF LEN V gt 25 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP characters WAIT 4500 GOTO 1130 If title is too long notify user and A P 1 4 2048 B FP A Ql IP A 1 IF B 0 THEN Q1 Q1 1 A P 2 4 2048 B FP A Q2 IP A 1 IF B 0 THEN Q2 Q2 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP Do you want a grid or graph DISP GRID GRAPH INPUT Q A 0 B 0 IF S Y THEN A 8 Single plot routine Input horiz title No more than 25 re enter hor
94. 01 mv for a decreasing 63 function If the code changed from 10105 to 10115 at 015 mV for an increasing function and from 10112 to 10105 at 005 mv for a decreasing function then one would know that there is a hysteresis error Non linearity describes the deviation of the analog values from a straight line in a plot of the measured conversion relationship This can be expressed by either of two 2 quantities 1 integral non linearity and 2 differential non linearity The integral non linearity is the overall deviation from a straight line transfer function This will be referred to simply as non linearity Differential non linearity is any deviation of the measured step from the ideal width Thus the differential non linearity is a measure of the performance at the bit level while integral non linearity describes the overall behavior of the ADC Both types of non linearity are used to qualify the quantity of monotonicity Monotonicity insures that an ADC will provide no decreasing output code for an increasing input voltage In addition to the errors associated with standard ADCs there is also the error associated with stuck bits This occurs when a bit is in a particular state 1 or 0 and remains in that state despite the change in input voltage Stuck bits are of particular interest in the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer since it uses a different type of A D conversion process Where the HP System Voltmeter and Nicolet Digital Osci
95. 1 72 and Im Ip 1 l Vmb and Imp represent the estimated data values V and I represent the actual data values To produce a decimal value for each of these quantities the binary numbers are multiplied by appropriate scalar values such that Vm V Vp 1 V t Av and Im AI Ip 1 I AI where AV Veg 27 AI Ifg 27 Vm and Ip represent the estimated data values V and I represent the actual data values AV and AI represent the estimated accuracies of the data values Vr and Ifg are the respective full scale values which can be measured by the system components In general n and m represent bit accuracies of the respective system components However for this system the two 2 bit accuracies are equivalent i e m n since the system is designed to take two 2 simultaneous measurements using a Single system component For this data acquisition system the values for voltage and current have errors of 1 one 1 part in 4096 of the full scale magnitude using the HP System Voltmeter 2 one 1 part in 4096 of the full scale magnitude using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and 3 one 1 part in 128 of the full scale magnitude using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer The error term associated with the HP Graphics Tablet is also in terms of the full scale magnitude however the full scale is dependent upon the data being digitized The HP Graphics Tablet has error terms of one 1 part in 12032 and one
96. 1 A IF J 0 THEN J POS Q1 V IF J 0 THEN 3870 IF Q A THEN P 1 5 NUM W1 I I y IF Q B THEN P 2 5 NUM W1 1 1 IF Q A IF Q B IF A 1 OR Q B THEN 4010 y Qs B t GOTO 3720 132 Conversion on one Conversion on both Input conversion Posn for current or posn for voltage Current or voltage No notify user Re enter conversion Yes posn for current or posn for voltage I or V No notify user Yes store A units Store B units THEN M VAL W1 1 1I 1 VAL Q1 1 J 1 Store A scale THEN N VAL W1 1 I 1 VAL Q1 1 J 1 Store B scale Another conversion Yes set values Repeat process 4010 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4080 4090 4100 4110 4120 4130 4140 4150 4160 4170 4180 4190 4200 4210 4220 4230 4240 4250 4260 4270 4280 4290 4300 4310 4320 4330 4340 4350 133 GOTO 4030 GOTO 4030 IF S 5 7 INT THEN 4100 No internal clk CLEAR BEEP No input clock freq DISP Enter the frequency of the DISP external clock using scientific DISP notation For example if the DISP frequency is 5 MHz enter 5E 6 INPUT A 0 0 A Set time scale RETURN REM REM REM STORAGE SUBROUTINE REM 1 CONVERTS DATA REM 2 STORES DATA ON REM TAPE OR DISK REM REM REM A 0 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND Cl 1 THEN WS A Set to store A sep IF W A THEN A P 1 4 Set to store A IF W B THEN A P 2 4 Set t
97. 1 K K 1 NEXT J FOR J 0 TO P 4 1 PRINT 1 K A 1 I J P1 M K K 1 NEXT J ASSIGN 1 TO RETURN OFF ERROR IF ERRN 63 THEN 1430 CLEAR BEEP DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN PURGE Z GOTO 1430 208 Trap file errors Create file space Open new file Store of curves Store of horiz div Store of vertical div Store date Store meas time Conversion routine Sort routine Store control reg Store time array Store magn array Close file File already exist Yes notify user Purge file Yes purge amp cont 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 209 CLEAR BEEP No enter new name DISP Enter another name INPUT 2 GOTO 1420 Retry storage IF ERRN4 130 THEN 330 No If there is not a disk error retry CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 GOTO 260 Re assign mass storage REM REM REM CONVERSION SUBROUTINE REM 1 SCALE INPUT REM REM CLEAR BEEP M 1 DISP Is an attenuator current DISP transformer thermocouple etc DISP being used Y N INPUT Q Conversion IF QS Y THEN RETURN No return CLEAR BEEP Yes cont DISP What is the conversion process DISP D
98. 1 TO 1830 RETURN 1840 DISP The A is OFF Turn 1850 DISP ON the A and press 1860 DISP CONTINUE 1870 RESET 7 PAUSE 1880 GOTO 1760 1890 IF ERRN 131 THEN 1840 1900 RETURN 1910 REM 1920 REM 1930 REM PLOTTING SYSTEM 1940 REM SUBROUTINE 1950 REM 1960 REM 1970 B 3 Set for plot option 1980 GOTO 2000 1990 B 4 Set for I V option 2000 ON ERROR GOSUB 2210 2010 CLEAR BEEP 2020 A 700 AS disk drive 2030 GOSUB 2080 2040 A 705 AS plotter 2050 GOSUB 2080 2060 IF B 3 THEN CHAIN PLOT D700 2070 OFF ERROR CHAIN I V D700 2080 ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 2160 92 Set values for disk Check for device Load processing Set timeout branch Open dummy file Close dummy file Notify user of timeout and ask for corrective actions Reset HPIB Retry to find subsystem Timeout error Trap timeout error Set values for disk Check for device Set values for plotter t Check for device Load Plot prog Load I V prog Set timeout branch 93 2090 IF A 700 THEN 2130 Not disk drive 2100 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 Open dummy file 2110 ASSIGN 1 TO Close dummy file 2120 RETURN 2130 OUTPUT A OI Address plotter 2140 ENTER A USING K BS Accept plotter response 2150 RETURN 2160 DISP The A is OFF Turn Notify user of 2170 DISP ON the A and press timeout and ask for 2180 DISP CONTINUE corrective actions 2190 RESET 7 PAUS
99. 10V 3 00 2 Enter the channel number and the voltage range 1Y 1 1V 2 10V 3 01 2 When the operator responds N to the prompt for the system voltmeter or the entries for use of the system voltmeter are completed the program prompts Adjust the POSITION knob on plug in A to set zero line Adjust the POSITION knob on plug in B to set zero line This prompt is to get the operator to adjust the baseline on the individual plug ins so that the sweeps appear in the correct position on the screen After the baseline is established for the plug ins the program prompts Enter the measurement settings on the front panel of the 7612D When entry is complete press the REMOTE button on the front panel lower center This program was developed to allow the operator to adjust instrument settings at the front panel This reduces the setup time and makes the entry easier After the operator is finished with the measurement setup the computer is notified that the system is prepared and the computer loads all of the measurement settings and reprints them on the 42 screen For the mainframe CLK INT BTA Orr WRI OFF ROS ON REM OFF For time base A REC 1 1024 SBPT 0 1E 6 MODE PRE 104 LTC LEFT SRC INT SLO POS HFR OFF CPL AC LEV 0 For time base B REC 1 1024 SBPT 0 1E 6 MODE PRE 104 LTC LEFT SRC INT SLO POS HFR OFF CPL AC LEV 0 Once the software has completed displaying the settings the operator is asked Are
100. 160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 READ 1 134 P 3 ASSIGN 2 TO K 1 FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 69 READ 1 K A I J K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I ASSIGN 1 TO REM REM REM SORT SUBROUTINE REM 1 FIND CHANNELS REM 2 FIND DATA REM FOR I 69 TO 66 STEP 1 IF A 1 1 9999 THEN 1240 NEXT I P1 69 I FOR I 1 TO 64 IF A 1 1 9999 THEN 1280 NEXT I P 4 I 1 P1 RETURN OFF ERROR IF ERRN 130 THEN 1010 CLEAR BEEP DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 260 REM REM REM STORE SUBROUTINE REM 1 CREATE FILE REM 2 STORE CURVE 207 Read start time Close main file Read aux data t Close aux file t Find last channel Set of curves Find last data pt Calculate of pts Disk error no retry Yes notify user Re enter mass storage 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 REM REM ON ERROR GOTO 1680 CREATE Z 10 2 P 4 8 OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO Z PRINT 1 1 1 PRINT 1 2 10 PRINT 1 3 8 PRINT 1 4 P 2 PRINT 1 5 P 3 GOSUB 1830 GOSUB 2140 K 6 FOR J 1 TO 5 PRINT 1 K P J K K 1 NEXT J FOR J 0 TO P 4 1 PRINT 1 K A 2 I J P
101. 20 3030 3040 3050 3060 3070 3080 3090 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 ON ERROR GOTO 3270 CREATE X B 8 OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO X PRINT 1 1 P1 PRINT 1 2 P 3 1 PRINT 1 3 P 3 2 PRINT 1 4 P 1 3 PRINT 1 5 P 2 3 K 6 FOR I F TO G FOR J 1 TO 5 PRINT 1 K P I d K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I FOR I F TO G FOR J 1 TO P I 4 PRINT 1 K X I J M I K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I FOR I F TO G FOR J 1 TO P I 4 PRINT 1 K Y 1 J N 1 2 1 K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I IF Cl 1 AND F 1 THEN F 2 G 2 GOTO 2680 If storing curves separately store second CLEAR BEEP DISP Data is stored DISP GOTO 860 OFF ERROR 155 Trap file create error Create file space Open file Store of curves Store of x divisions Store of y divisions Store date Store time Store control registers Store x data Store y data curve Return to main prog 3280 3290 3300 3310 3320 3330 3340 3350 3360 3370 3380 3390 3400 3410 3420 3430 3440 3450 3460 3470 3480 3490 3500 3510 3520 3530 3540 3550 3560 3570 3580 3590 3600 3610 156 IF ERRN 63 THEN 3380 File already exist CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q Purge file IF Q Y THEN PURGE X GOTO 2950 Yes purge amp cont CLEAR BEEP No enter new name DISP Enter an
102. 2830 IF H G lt H THEN P 1 2 H 8 2840 RETURN 105 Set time per division Set magnitude per div If max amp min gt 0 set mag div so min 0 106 NIC85 The NIC85 program is a highly modified version of a software package purchased from Software Consulting Group of Santa Clara California The program controls the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope and if desired the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM The oscilloscope is used to make up to four 4 1024 point measurements The operator takes the measurements using the oscilloscope Once a good measurement is acquired the program stores the curves in pairs These pairs are selected by the operator The DACU and DVM are used to take measurements of slower phenomena They are used to make up to four 4 16 point measurements These instruments are used during the storage cycle of the program This data is stored by the program and later processed using the VMAUX program 107 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM NICOLET 85 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 7 8 85 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 REM Chuck Graves wizard 90 REM 100 REM 110 COM X 10 Make file name common 120 DIM D 8200 H 29 130 SHORT P 3 5 T 2 69 A 7 B 7 C 7 D 7 2 7 140 CLEAR BEEP 150 DISP DISP Initializing 160 GOSUB 1050 Initialize registers 170 CLEAR BEEP 180 DISP Do you want to use the s
103. 60 7170 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP WAIT This program is developed for single record usage only Please reset the number of records to 1 and adjust the record length if necessary 4500 Q GOTO 570 IF A4 lt 1024 AND B4 lt 1024 THEN 840 CLEAR BEEP DISP The processing program can only DISP handle a record less than or DISP equal to 1024 points Please DISP choose a record length of less DISP than or equal to 1024 points WAIT 4500 GOTO 570 P 1 4 A4 P 2 4 B4 CLEAR BEEP GOSUB 3490 CLEAR BEEP Q s A and B are R W C IF P1 gt 1 THEN 990 DISP Which time base is to be armed DISP A B INPUT WS IF W A OR W B THEN 980 CLEAR BEEP DISP WAIT os Please choose A or B 4500 GOTO 880 ewSe is e GOSUB 2870 1000 IF Q Y THEN 1080 1010 DISP Do you wish to change the 1020 DISP settings Y N 1030 INPUT Q 123 No notify user Reset front panel Yes file too long Yes notify user Reset front panel Set pts in crv 1 Set pts in crv 2 Conversion routine Arm both timebases Input timebase Timebase valid No notify user Re enter timebase Yes cont Arm amp read routine Keep data No then change settings 124 1040 IF Q Y THEN 570 Yes reset frt panel 1050 Q s
104. 69 TO I STEP 1 Yes check entries IF T 1 J A THEN 5880 Entered previously CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 5850 5860 5870 5880 5890 5900 5910 5920 5930 5940 5950 5960 5970 5980 5990 6000 6010 6020 6030 6040 6050 6060 6070 6080 6090 6100 6110 6120 6130 6140 6150 6160 6170 6180 6190 DISP You have already chosen that DISP channel Please enter another WAIT 4500 GOTO 5680 NEXT J T 1 1 A T 2 1 B NEXT I T2 1 RETURN REM REM REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE REM ACQUISITION REM REM CLEAR 709 CLEAR 724 OUTPUT 709 AFOAL9I99ACO OUTPUT 724 T3R3D 1S FOR I1 69 TO 70 T1 STEP 1 OUTPUT 709 AC amp VALS T 1 11 OUTPUT 724 R amp VALS T 1 11 T1 WAIT 500 TRIGGER 724 ENTER 724 T 1 T2 T 2 T2 TIME T 2 65 T2 T2 1 NEXT 11 RETURN REM REM REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE REM STORAGE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP What name do you want for the 139 Re enter chan rng No store values Set time index Clear DACU amp DVM Select 0 of 0 999 Man trg 10V rng 1s dly Close chan on DACU Set rng on DVM Let voltage settle Trigger DVM Store DVM voltage Store time Increment time index 6200 6210 6220 6230 6240 6250 6260 6270 6280 6290 6300 6310 6320 6330 6340 6350 6360 6370 6380 6390 6400 6410 6420 6430 6440 6450 6460 6470 6480 6490 6500 6510 6520 6530 6540 DISP auxiliary file
105. 7 are comparable for the HP Graphics Tablet Therefore the error terms for energy are 1 one 1 part in 2048 of Emax using the HP System Voltmeter within the constraints outlined in the previous paragraph 2 one 1 part in 2048 of Emax sing the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope 3 one 1 part in 64 of Emax uSing the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer and 4 one 1 part in 1143 of Emax for the HP Graphics Tablet 5 3 3 Value Selection Accuracy An additional function of the data processing is to select specific values for voltage current power and energy These values are evaluated at second breakdown and at 10 of second breakdown These values are then rounded to three 3 significant figures In order to be confident in these values the data must be accurate to one 1 part in 1000 In Table 5 1 the accuracies for each system component are summarized according to the data type e g voltage or current Table 5 1 Summary of Processing Accuracies Component Time Voltage Power Energy HP 3437A 1 20000 1 4096 1 2048 1 2048 Nicolet 2090 1 20 5M 1 4096 1 2048 1 2048 Tek 7612D 1 14 6M 1 128 1 64 1 64 HP 9111A 1 4000 1 3200 1 1600 1 1143 1 All of the values are with respect to their maximum magnitude 2m represents millions i e 14 6M is 14 6 million 3 Voltage accuracies also apply to any signal quantities e g current 77 A cursory examination of the summary shows that all values for the HP System Voltmeter the Nicole
106. 780 3790 3800 3810 3820 3830 3840 3850 3860 3870 3880 3890 3900 3910 3920 3930 3940 3950 3960 3970 3980 3990 4000 4010 4020 4030 118 IF ERRN 63 THEN 3590 File already exist CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q Purge file IF Q Y THEN PURGE Y GOTO 3590 Yes purge amp cont CLEAR BEEP No enter new name DISP Enter another name INPUT Y GOTO 3490 Retry storage REM REM REM SCALING SUBROUTINE REM A SCALE INPUT FOR REM TRANSFORMER ETC REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP Is an attenuator current DISP transformer current sensing DISP resistor or multiplying probe DISP being used Y N INPUT Q Conversion IF QS Y THEN RETURN No return CLEAR BEEP Yes cont DISP Which of the curves uses one DISP of the devices VALS F VALS G VALS F G DISP DISP VALS F G is equivalent to both INPUT Q IF Q F G THEN E Q Q F If both curves set values to enter first CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the conversion process DISP for curve VALS Q 2 DISP 4040 4050 4060 4070 4080 4090 4100 4110 4120 4130 4140 4150 4160 4170 4180 4190 4200 4210 4220 4230 4240 4250 4260 4270 4280 119 DISP For example a 6 dB attenuator DISP converts a 2 volt input at the DISP source to a l volt input at the DISP scop
107. A DATA ACQUISITION AND CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR ANALYSIS OF FAST TRANSIENTS IN SEMICONDUCTORS by COOLIDGE MARION GRAVES JR B S E E A THESIS IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Submitted to the Graduate Faculty of Texas Tech University in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Degree of MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Approved Chairpeyson of the Committee Accepted Dean gi the Graduate School May 1989 305 T3 1929 No S0 Cop 2 Copyright 1989 Coolidge Marion Graves Jr FOREWORD The software discussed in this thesis was developed exclusively for the Solid State Electronics Laboratory in the Department of Electrical Engineering at Texas Tech University All of the programs except one were written by the author The single exception was the program controlling the communications between the laboratory s HP 85 Desktop Computer and Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope This program was initially developed by Software Consulting Group of Santa Clara CA In order to integrate this program into the system under development extensive modifications were necessary The necessary modifications were performed by the author As a result the present software represents the efforts of the author and the software engineers of Software Consulting Group Their efforts and assistance are greatly appreciated and duly recognized ii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I owe my sincerest gratitude to the many individua
108. A LISTEN 2 SCG 2 Listener rt plugin 1780 OUTPUT 7 INP BW CPL RIN VAR V D POL POS PRB Ask for input bandwidth coupling term imp variable gain volt div polarity position probe multiplier for right plugin 1790 SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 2 Talker rt plugin 1800 ENTER 7 USING K B2 Enter rt plugin set 1810 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Listener 7612D 1820 OUTPUT 7 TMBS B NBPT Ask B breakpoints 1830 SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 Talker 7612D 1840 ENTER 7 USING K B1 Enter B breakpoints 1850 A POS S TMBS A Begin timebase A set 1860 B POS S TMBS B Being timebase B set 1870 A S A 7 B 1 Timebase A string 1880 B S B 7 LEN S Timebase B string 1890 Al VAL A1 5 LEN A1 1 timebase A bkpts 1900 B1 VAL B1 5 LEN B1 1 timebase B bkpts 1910 A POS A2 V D Posn left volt div str 1920 B POS B2 V D Posn rt volt div str 1930 A2 VAL A2 A 4 A 9 Left plugin volt div 1940 B2 VAL B2 B 4 B 9 Rt plugin volt div 1950 A POS AS Posn record A 1960 B POS AS Posn record length A 1970 A3 VAL AS A 1 A 1 Timebase A record 1980 A4 VAL AS A 1 B 1 Timebase A rec length 1990 A POS BS Posn record B 2000 B POS BS Posn record length B 2010 B3 VAL B A 1 A 1 Timebase B record 2020 B4 VAL BS A 1 B 1 Timebase B rec length 127 2030 A POS A SBPT Posn bkpt settings A 2040 B POS AS MO
109. A and B are 1060 IF W A OR WS B THEN 980 1070 GOTO 990 No re arm and reread 1080 CLEAR BEEP Yes store data 1090 DISP Where do you want the curves 1100 DISP stored DISK00 DISKO1 TAPE 1110 INPUT Q Input data destination 1120 IF Q TAPE THEN R T 1130 IF Q DISK01 THEN R D701 1140 MASS STORAGE IS R Set mass storage unit 1150 CLEAR BEEP 1160 DISP What name do you want for the 1170 DISP storage file 1180 INPUT X Input file name 1190 IF LEN X lt 10 THEN 1250 Name too long 1200 CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 1210 DISP Name is too large Please enter 1220 DISP a name with less than 11 1230 DISP letters 1240 WAIT 4500 GOTO 1150 Re enter file name 1250 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND C1 0 AND P1 gt 1 THEN GOSUB 6490 Same type curve routine C is separate curve storage 1260 IF C N THEN 860 Return to conversion 1270 CLEAR BEEP 1280 DISP DISP DISP 1290 DISP Storing data in X 1300 GOSUB 4110 Store data 1310 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND Cl 1 AND WS A THEN wS B GOTO 1150 Store next curve separately 1320 CLEAR BEEP 1330 DISP Data is stored 1340 DISP DISP Do you want to take another 1350 DISP set of data Y N 1360 INPUT Q 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 125 IF QS Y THEN 1430 Ta
110. AND D lt 1 THEN D 1 IF D gt 1 AND D lt 2 THEN D 2 IF D gt 2 AND D lt 2 5 THEN D 2 5 IF D gt 2 5 AND D lt 5 THEN D 5 IF D gt 5 AND D lt 10 THEN D 10 IF D gt 10 AND D lt 20 THEN D 20 IF D gt 20 AND D lt 25 THEN D 25 IF D gt 25 AND D lt 50 THEN D 50 IF D gt 50 THEN D 1 WS k amp WS RETURN REM REM REM STRING SUBROUTINE REM REM REM E 0 1 OUTPUT PREFIX FOR F 1 TO LEN WS 1 IF WS F F k THEN E E 3 188 Increment engr ind Change units to reflect change in number Round number to desireable value for graphing purposes Change from strings of m or k to acceptable prefixes Ex kkk G Increment engr ind 2850 2860 2870 2880 2890 2900 2910 2920 2930 2940 2950 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 3050 3060 3070 3080 3090 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 189 IF WS F F m THEN E E 3 Decrement engr ind NEXT F IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF IF Ew12 THEN WS T amp WS LEN WS LEN WS E 9 THEN WS G 6WS LEN WS LEN WS E 6 THEN W M W LEN WS LEN WS E 3 THEN W k amp W LEN WS LEN WS E 0 THEN W WS LEN WS LEN WS E 3 THEN WS m EWS LEN WS LEN WS E 6 THEN WS u amp WS LEN WS LEN WS E 9 THEN WS n amp WS LEN WS LEN WS E 12 THEN W p WS LEN WS LEN WS E 15 THEN WS f 6WS LEN WS L
111. AO A Be eae Se 258 11 2 Data PreparatioM ooooooooooooonoromoooreo o 258 11 3 Main Program Operati0M ooooooooooooooooooo 259 11 3 1 Main Program SetuP oooooooooooo moro oooo 259 11 3 2 Data ENntYIy ooooooooooocoomorononnom lt r lt oon o 261 11 3 3 Functional BranchinG coeo eo oooo ro 261 11 4 End of Curve Opti0NM ooooooocooooocororo rro moro 262 11 5 Data StoraQl oooooooooooooooncoccrcnornracnannon 262 11 5 1 File Creation ErrTorS oooooooooooooooooo o 262 11 5 2 Normal OperationS o ooooooocooooronomP oo 263 11 6 Print Device Data ooooooooooomoonoccrrrororo nos 263 11 7 New Curve Set ooooooooooocoocrrrooonnc9 99 lt r 2 osoassso 264 11 8 ETO SROd ss ui SS IRA A DAR A ia a 264 220 TABLE OF CONTENTS cont 11 9 Reference ooooooooooooooo A a 200 12 AUXILIARY FORMATTING PACKAGE oo ooooooooo sinewave tee 206 12 1 Overview sive Ste aria ete Serre Sede EE EEE eons ei 266 12 2 Data Retrieval CUAD A areca he 266 12 2 1 Read EB amp rors cia a E 266 12 2 2 Normal Read OperationS oooooooooooooooo 267 12 3 Data St r AAA ARA A RA AA A 267 12 3 1 File Creation ErrorS sesesesosesssssoos 267 12 3 2 True Unit Computation sessssesssssesssss gt o 268 12 3 3 Normal Storage OperationS o oo oo ooo 268 12 4 RETOTONCO ica AAA E SH eR ele Sas 269 13 NORMAL
112. DE Posn of trig mode A 2050 A3S AS A 4 B 2 Timebase A bkpts 2060 A POS BS SBPT Posn bkpt settings B 2070 B POS BS MODE Posn of trig mode B 2080 B39 BS A 4 B 2 Timebase B bkpts 2090 WS A3 A Al N 1 2100 FOR I 1 TO A Get breakpoints 2110 B POS WS Posn of bkpt 2120 IF N 1 THEN C 1 1 VAL WS 1 B 1 Store bkpt count A 2130 D 1 1I VAL WS 1 B 1 Store bkpt count B 2140 WS WS B 1 LEN WS Shorten string 2150 B POS WS Posn new sampling 2160 IF B 0 THEN 2210 Last bkpt 2170 IF N 1 THEN C 2 1 VAL WS 1 B 1 No store new smpl tm A 2180 D 2 1 VAL W 1 B 1 Store new smpl time B 2190 WS WS B 1 LEN WS Shorten string 2200 NEXT I 2210 IF N 1 THEN C 2 1 VAL WS Yes store smpl time A 2220 D 2 1I VAL WS Store last smpl time B 2230 IF N 1 THEN 2260 Another curve 2240 W B3 A B1 N 2 Yes assign values 2250 GOTO 2100 Repeat process 2260 A 5 W S 1 LEN S LEN A LEN B 14 N 0 Find 5 substrings workspace is mainframe info 2270 CLEAR BEEP No cont 2280 DISP For the mainframe 2290 GOSUB 2460 Decomposition routine 2300 WAIT 4500 2310 A 9 WS AS N A1 QS A Find 9 substrings workspace is timebase A info 2320 CLEAR BEEP 2330 DISP For time base Q 2340 GOSUB 2460 Decomposition routine 2350 WAIT 4500 2360 IF QS B THEN 2390 2370 A 9 WS B N B1 Q B Find 9 substrings workspace is timebase 238
113. E Reset HPIB 2200 GOTO 2000 Retry to find subsystem 2210 IF ERRN 131 THEN 2160 Timeout error 2220 RETURN 2230 REM 2240 REM 2250 REM GRAPHICS SYSTEM 2260 REM SUBROUTINE 2270 REM 2280 REM 2290 CLEAR BEEP 2300 DISP This program is not operational Notify user that 2310 DISP Please choose another function graphics not 2320 WAIT 4500 functional 2330 GOTO 130 Return to main prog 2340 REM 2350 REM 2360 REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE 2370 REM SUBSYSTEM 2380 REM 2390 REM 2400 CLEAR BEEP 2410 DISP Do you want to use the system 2420 DISP voltmeter to make additional 2430 DISP readings Y N 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 2630 2640 2650 2660 2670 2680 2690 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 2750 2760 2770 2780 94 INPUT V IF V Y THEN 2470 Aux measurements RETURN No return ON ERROR GOSUB 2640 Yes trap timeout error A 709 A HP control unit B TD Set values for DACU GOSUB 2530 Check for device A 724 AS HP voltmeter BS R1 Set values for DVM GOSUB 2530 Check for device RETURN ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 2580 Set timeout branch CLEAR A OUTPUT A BS Clear Send setting IF A 724 THEN TRIGGER A Trigger if DVM ENTER A BS Accept response RETURN CLEAR BEEP DISP The AS is OFF Turn Notify user of DISP ON the A and press timeo
114. EN WS E 18 THEN WS a amp WS LEN WS LEN WS X0 2 THEN X0 10 E Scale for horiz YO 2 THEN Y0 10 E l Scale for vert RETURN REM REM REM INITIALIZATION REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP Initializing T 1 Unprocessed file I t ime Horiz axis time FOR I 1 TO 2048 X I 0 Initialize horiz reg Y I 0 Initialize vert reg NEXT I FOR I 1 TO 3 FOR J 1 TO 5 P I J 0 Initialize cntl reg NEXT J NEXT I 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 3280 3290 3300 3310 3320 3330 3340 3350 3360 3370 3380 3390 3400 3410 3420 3430 3440 3450 PLOTTER IS 705 H 95 X0 1 Y0 1 ON ERROR GOSUB 3250 IF X NULL THEN RETURN RETURN IF ERRN 7 THEN X NULL OFF ERROR RETURN REM REM REM SUPPLEMENTARY LABEL REM SUBROUTINE REM 1 LABEL GRID OR GRAPH REM REM LORG 6 FOR J 0 TO P 3 2 MOVE At J U B 25 V LABEL VALS A J U NEXT J LORG 8 FOR J 0 TO P 3 2 MOVE A 25 U B J V LABEL VALS B J V NEXT J RETURN 190 Default scale factors Trap file error File error set default Label posn upr cnt Plot x axis labels Label posn cnt rt Plot y axis labels 191 MATH The MATH program conducts all mathematical processing The program reads in stored data for voltage and current and generates a time frame for processing based upon the two 2 sets of time
115. ER Still active Do not attempt to modify a program when a TRANSFER is active An interface has failed self test This indicates a probable hardware problem The I O operation attempted is not valid with the type of interface being used Some examples are specifying a status or control register that does not exist using a primary address with an RS 232 interface or using an I O statement that is not 389 Possible Corrective Action Before you modify or rerun the program stop all active with a RESET HALT or ABORTIO instruction or press the RESET key ERRSC can be used to determine which interface has failed Try recycling the power turn computer off then back on again If the interface still fails contact the authorized HP 85 dealer or the HP sales and service office from which you purchased your HP 85 ERRL can be used to identify the improper statement Check this statement in the Syntax Reference section to determine if it is defined for the interface being 112 ROM 113 defined for the interface being used The I O ROM has failed the checksum self test This indicates a probable hardware problem An interface dependent error HP IB The statement used requires the interface to be system controller Serial UART receiver overrun data has been lost BCD Attempting to put the interface into an illegal mode GPIO An odd number of bytes was transferred when the i
116. ERS OR 3540 REM ATTENUATORS 3550 REM 3560 REM 3570 M 1 N 1 Default scale factors 3580 DISP Is an attenuator current 3590 DISP transformer or current sensing 3600 DISP resistor being used Y N 3610 DISP DISP Do not consider x10 probes 3620 INPUT Q 3630 IF QS Y THEN 4010 Conversion No return 3640 IF WS C THEN QS WS A 1 GOTO 3720 Yes if only taking one curve then input that conversion 3650 CLEAR BEEP Otherwise ask which curve 3660 3670 3680 3690 3700 3710 3720 3730 3740 3750 3760 3770 3780 3790 3800 3810 3820 3830 3840 3850 3860 3870 3880 3890 3900 3910 3920 3930 3940 3950 3960 3970 3980 3990 4000 DISP Which of the plug ins uses one DISP of these devices A B C DISP DISP C is equivalent to A and B INPUT Q IF QS C THEN A 1 IF Q C THEN A 2 Q A CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP What is the coversion process for time base Q 2 For example a 6 dB attenuator converts a 2 volt input at the source to a l volt input at the scope So conversion is 2V to lv entered 2V 1V Enter using scientific notation and include units A or V INPUT W1 Q15 I POS W1 A IF I 0 THEN I POS W1 V IF I 0 THEN 3910 CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP WAIT Please redo and include the appropriate units A or V 4500 GOTO 3720 J POS Q
117. Electronics Laboratory has carried out work in a number of areas in recent years These activities range from fabrication to characterization to reliability studies Some process times were on the order of weeks while other measurements involved characteristics on the order of a few nanoseconds Thus a flexible system was necessary which could acquire data from a few nanoseconds to a few weeks This involved the development of a system incorporating a number of data acquisition units with a wide range of capabilities In addition the system needed to have the capability to store the data acquired on permanent media In this manner a record was preserved of all measurements Therefore old measurements and data could be recalled and reprinted at any future time The work was no longer dependent only upon a single hardcopy result Also data storage facilitated calculations based on the data The system also was designed to support some limited data conditioning activities At the time of this work software was developed for calculating products and time integrals of products from the data A final requirement of the system was the entry of data taken prior to the development of the data acquisition system data external to the Solid State Electronics Laboratory and data acquisition beyond the time resolution capabilities of the equipment on the system This was to facilitate entry of any data which was of importance to a program Thus the s
118. Error Number Error Condition 67 File name Name does not exist when attempt to LOAD ASSIGN LOAD BIN PURGE RENAME or SECURE Name not in quotes Attempt to PURGE an open file 68 File type mismatch Attempting to treat program as data file or vice versa Attempting to treat binary program as BASIC main program file or vice versa Attempting to treat data as binary program Or vice versa 69 Random overflow attempting to READ PRINT beyond existing number of bytes in logically defined record with random file access 70 READ error system cannot read tape 71 End of file no data beyond EOF mark in data file 72 Record Attempting to READ PRINT to record that doesn t exist e g READ 1 120 when only 100 records in file Attempting to READ PRINT at end of file Lost in record close file to release buffer 73 Searches and does not find Bad tape cartridge may have been exposed to magnet field Cannot find directory tape may need to be initialized 74 Stall either bad tape cartridge or transport problem refer to Tape Operations appendix B HP 85 User s Manual 75 Not an HP 85 file cannot read 76 79 Not used 387 Error Number Error Condition Syntax Errors 80 thru 92 80 Right parentheses expected 81 Bad BASIC statement or bad expression If it is an expression try it again with DISP lt expression gt to get a better error message 82 String expression error e g right quote missing or null string g
119. GND Gnd left plugin 5180 SEND 7 5190 OUTPUT 7 5200 SEND 7 5210 OUTPUT 7 5220 SEND 7 5230 TRANSFER UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 2 137 Listener rt plugin B2 1 6 4 V D amp VALS B2 amp CPL GND Gnd rt plugin UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 ARM Q1 MTRIG READ 4Q1 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 7 TO DS FHS EOI 5240 IF Ql A THEN D1 DS 5250 D2 DS Listener 7612D Arm trigger curve Talker 7612D Fast transfer data Store curve A data Store curve B data 5260 IF Q1 A AND A 2 THEN Ql1 B D Q GOTO 5200 If both channels reset values and repeat process 5270 20 0 Z1 0 5280 IF A 2 OR Ql A THEN D1 D1 4 LEN D1 1 20 1 Default zeroline errors Remove unnecessary string information from curve A 5290 IF A 2 OR Q1 B THEN D2 D2 5 LEN D2 1 21 1 Remove unnecessary string information from curve B 5300 B 0 C 0 5310 FOR I 1 TO 10 5320 IF Q1 B AND A 1 THEN 5340 5330 B B NUM D1 1 1 5340 C C NUM D2 I 1 5350 NEXT I 5360 20 IP 20 B 1 1 5 5370 Z1 IP 21 C 1 1 5 5380 SEND 7 5390 OUTPUT 7 5400 SEND 7 5410 OUTPUT 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 1 A2 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 2 B2 5420 IF A 2 THEN Q1 C 5430 D Q 5440 RETURN 5450 REM 5460 REM D1 Q D2 n 5470 REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE 5480 REM 5490 REM SUBROUTINE Average 15t 10 samples Curve B only No add next A value Add next B value Zeroline error A
120. HP 83 85 keyboard and thus aborted 2 Attempting to digitize from the CRT 1 Invalid select code in PLOTTER IS PRINTER IS or CRT IS The error will not occur until you try to output to the non existing interface card 2 The I O card may not have identified itself at power on Turn the HP 83 85 off check all connections then turn it on again Invalid address in PLOTTER IS PRINTER IS or CRT IS E g specifying PLOTTER IS 750 The largest HP IB address is 31 The addressed peripheral device does not respond If the device does not respond within 2 seconds after it is addressed with a PLOTTER IS PRINTER IS or CRT IS statement this error will occur PERMISSION TO COPY In presenting this thesis in partial fulfillment of the requirements for a master s degree at Texas Tech University I agree that the Library and my major department shall make it freely avail able for research purposes Permission to copy this thesis for scholarly purposes may be granted by the Director of the Library or my major professor It is understood that any copying or publication of this thesis for financial gain shall not be allowed without my further written permission and that any user may be liable for copy right infringement Disagree Permission not granted Agree Permission granted CM irana ue Student s signature Student s signature Date Date
121. I 0 Initialize remaining time register for new time pts NEXT I ON ERROR GOSUB 3310 Trap file errors IF X NULL THEN RETURN RETURN IF ERRN 7 THEN X NULL File error set default IF ERRN 63 THEN 3360 Unknown error retry PURGE TEMPX Purge work file CREATE TEMPX L 8 Attempt to recreate OFF ERROR RETURN 203 YMAUX The HP85 Desktop Computer has limited memory space Therefore during the data acquisition processes using the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope auxiliary data acquired from the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM is stored in a compact format The YMAUX program was written to convert this compact data format into a standard format The VMAUX program reads the compact data file into the computer generates the control registers necessary for later processing and stores the data in standard format This program is called automatically by NIC85 and 7612D before they pass control back to Autost 10 REN 20 REM 30 REM AUXILIARY PROCESSING 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 REM REM REM 60 REM Copyright 5 31 85 REM gandalf software inc Chuck Graves wizard REM COM X 10 DIM A 2 69 P 5 Y 10 2 10 CLEAR BEEP DISP Initiali
122. IN VMAUX D700 No load auxiliary processing if auxiliary data was taken CLEAR BEEP Return to Autost DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control 1000 FOR I 1 TO 65 1010 BEEP 65 I 20 1020 NEXT I 1030 CHAIN Autost D700 Load Autost 1040 END 1050 REM 1060 REM 1070 REM INITIALIZATION 1080 REM SUBROUTINE 1090 REM 1100 REM 1110 FOR I 1 TO 3 1120 FOR J 1 TO 5 1130 P I J 0 1140 NEXT J 1150 NEXT I 1160 P 1 3 DATE 1170 P 1 4 1024 P 2 4 1024 1180 P 1 5 86 P 2 5 86 1190 P 3 1 10 P 3 2 8 1200 R D700 S N Default mass storage and data storage flag 1210 N N 1220 F 1 G 2 1230 M 1 N 1 1240 FOR I 1 TO 2 1250 FOR J 1 TO 69 1260 T I J 9999 1270 NEXT J 1280 NEXT I 1290 R 1 1300 FOR I 1 TO 7 1310 A I 0 B I 0 1320 C I 0 D I 0 1330 2Z 1 0 1340 NEXT I 1350 RETURN 1360 REM 1370 REM 110 Initialize cntl reg Store date Default pts per curve Default units Dflt horiz amp vert div Default new data flag Default scale factors Initialize aux reg Initialize norms 1 amp 2 Initialize norms 3 amp 4 Initialize norms 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 REM AUXILIARY VOLTAGE REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DI
123. ISP For example a 6 dB attenuator DISP converts a 2 volt input at the DISP source to a 1 volt input at the DISP scope So conversion is 2V to DISP 1V entered 2V 1V Enter using DISP scientific notation and proper DISP units A V K etc INPUT WS Q Input conversion P 5 NUM WS LEN WS LEN WS IF NUM Q LEN Q LEN Q 86 THEN 2120 Conversion valid CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP Incorrect entry The voltage 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 210 DISP entry should be on the right DISP Re enter WAIT 4500 GOTO 1950 M VAL WS VAL Q RETURN Re enter conversion Calculate scale factor REM REM REM SORT SUBROUTINE REM 1 FIND UNIT DIV REM REM G A 1 1 Default minimum H A 1 1 Default maximum FOR J 1 TO P 4 1 IF A 1 1 J P1 lt G THEN G A 1 1 J P1 Set if new min IF A 1 I J P1 gt H THEN H A 1 1I J P1 Set if new max NEXT J P 1 A 2 I P1 P 4 1 10 Calculate time div P 2 H G 8 Calculate magn div IF H G lt H THEN P 2 H 8 If max min gt 0 set RETURN magn div so min 0 APPENDIX B PROGRAM PROTECTION CODES 211 212 An integral part of any software based system is the security of the program files Key security concerns are the accidental overwriting and the indiscriminate changing of program
124. K1 through K10 or the softkeys on the graphics tablet SK1 through SK16 The program allows the operator to choose a key s function 1 end of curve depress Kl 2 store data depress K2 3 process new data depress K3 4 finished depress K4 5 print device data depress K5 The program also allows the operator to digitize a softkey 1 end of curve digitize SK1 2 store data digitize SK2 3 process new data digitize SK3 4 finished digitize SK4 5 print device data digitize SKS5 262 41 4 End of Curve Option The end of curve option chosen by depressing K1 or digitizing SK1 notifies TABLET that the previous data point is the last one in the curve If there is another curve to be digitized the program will return to the beginning of the data entry cycle section 11 3 2 Otherwise TABLET notifies the operator that the digitization is complete and asks for a softkey or key choice If the operator chooses the end of curve option after the digitization has been completed nothing will happen The program will simply repeat the message and wait for a proper softkey or key choice 11 53 Data Storage When the operator chooses to store data TABLET will ask for a file name The file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a name the program will ask the operator to enter a valid name Once the program has received a valid file name TABLET will ask where the operator wishes the
125. N 2610 No storage routine CLEAR BEEP Yes cont DISP Do you wish to digitize another DISP set of curves Y N INPUT Q New data set IF Q Y THEN 160 Yes start over CLEAR BEEP No return to Autost DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 1 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 Load Autost END REM REM 1000 REM INITIALIZATION 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 c C1 REM SUBROUTINE REM REM OUTPUT 706 IN FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 512 X 1 J3 0 Y 1 3 0 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO 5 P I J 0 P 3 J3 0 NEXT J M I 0 N I 0 NEXT I L 0 FOR I 1 TO 4 U 1 0 V I 0 NEXT I FOR I 1 TO 3 T 1 0 NEXT I P 1 5 86 P 2 5 86 R D700 F 1 C Y C1 0 RETURN REM REM REM VISUAL AID REM SUBROUTINE REM REM PRINTER IS 2 store identical curves separately stores are not identical in type 149 Initialize tablet Initialize x reg Initialize y reg Initialize cntl reg Initialize scale factor Initialize corner x reg Initialize corner y reg Initialize temp reg Default units V Default mass storage Use thermal printer 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470
126. NAME TEMPX TO Y CLEAR BEEP DISP The processing is finished DISP Would you like to process DISP another set of curves Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN 140 CLEAR BEEP DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 1 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 END OFF ERROR IF ERRN 130 THEN 240 CLEAR BEEP DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 180 REM REM REM INTERPOLATION SUBROUTINE REM 1 FIND SLOPES AND INTERCEPTS REM 2 EVALUATE SLOW GRAPH REM FOR RAPID GRAPH POINTS REM REM FOR Il 1 TO P 3 4 1 M 1 11 Y 11 1 Y 11 Z I1 1 2 T1 Rename processed file Another set of curves Yes restart process No return to Autost Load Autost prog Disk error no retry Yes notify user Re enter mass storage Calculate slope 198 1910 M 2 11 Y 11 M 1 11 Z I1 Calculate intercept 1920 NEXT I1 1930 I2 0 1940 FOR I1 2 TO P 3 4 Evaluate for new times 1950 FOR J P 3 5 TO P 3 3 1960 P 3 5 J Update index 1970 IF X J gt Z I1 THEN 2020 If new time is outside bounds change to new bounds 1980 12 12 1 Increment storage index 1990 Y I2 M 1 11 1 X J M 2 11 1 Evaluate for new time 2000 IF J 256 AND I14P 3 4 THEN GOSUB 2810 If evaluated 256 new pts but not finished then store now 2010 NEXT J 2020 NEXT I1 2030 RETURN 2040 REM 2050 REM 2060 REM MATH SUBROUTINE 2070 REM
127. P current INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Actual at SB CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter reverse base current DISP at SB INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Comments CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter any additional comments INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT PRINT 3960 3970 3980 3990 4000 4010 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4080 4090 4100 4110 4120 4130 4140 4150 4160 4170 4180 4190 4200 4210 4220 4230 4240 4250 4260 4270 4280 4290 158 RETURN REM REM REM Unused Softkeys REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP This softkey performs no DISP function Please choose DISP another N1 N1 1 Increment nuisance ind IF N1 lt 4 THEN RETURN Not a nuisance return PLOTTER IS 1 Is a nuisance CSIZE 21 GCLEAR notify user SCALE 0 10 0 10 MOVE 1 5 LABEL BUZZ MOVE 2 0 LABEL OFF WAIT 4500 GCLEAR RETURN REM REM REM ZERO CALIBRATION REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP For curve VAL I DISP on a scale of 0 to VALS P 3 2 what is DISP the y coordinate for the origin DISP 0 lower left corner DISP VALS P 3 2 2 left center and DISP VALS P 3 2 upper left corner 4300 4310 4320 4330 4340 4350 4360 4370 4380 4390 4400 4410 4420 4430 4440 4450 4460 4470 4480 4490 4500 4510 4520 4530 4540 4550 INPUT Z 1 IF Z 1 gt 0 AND Z 1 lt P 3 2 THEN 4360 CLEAR
128. Re assign of data points for first curve Read calculated beginning to ending x values of first curve Notify user of initial read and sort Calculate of reads to complete processing Store x value as upper limit of flagged curve Read x value from second curve x value some x in first curve Store x value x value final x of second curve Yes Re assign of data points 295 Notify user of unusual error No Is Char error Yes 130 Purge file Yes Is there an a Turn off error error Create file Notify user creating file Sort all x values together 296 Close old file Assign buffer to new file No Store control register Yes Store x data there another curve Store y values Is in new file this the last read Evaluate y values for each x value Read remaining pts No Read 256 points Find slopes and intercepts for y curve Notify user file name is too long Wait 4500 Assign additional buffer to new file Is No file name too long Is Enter new file name this the last read Read 256 points Read remaining pts the time integral been evaluated Multiply two curves curves been by each other multiplied Stor
129. SP Enter value and unit for DISP example 5A 5 A INPUT P I 2 AS P 1 5 NUM AS M 1 P 3 1 P 1 1 U 4 U 3 N I P 3 2 P I 2 V 1 V 3 GOSUB 4170 NEXT I 152 Correct y lower RH Left boundary length Correct x upper LH Correct y upper LH Correct x upper RH Correct y upper RH Input of x divisions Input of y divisions Store date Store time Input x division Input y division Store units in cntl reg Calculate x scaling Calculate y scaling Zeroline routine 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 153 RETURN REM REM REM ACTIVE SUBROUTINE REM A GET DATA REM B CONTROL BRANCH REM REM GOSUB 1540 Digitization routine IF NOT S THEN 2400 If not digitization then repeat process IF B 7 THEN RETURN If softkey return GOSUB 2480 Pt correction routine X I J T 1 Store x value Y I J T 2 Store y value RETURN ON T 1 GOTO 670 2610 790 790 Softkey branches end of curve storage new set finished REM REM REM SKEW SUBROUTINE REM A ADJUST ROTATION REM REM V1 SQR U 3 T 1 2 V 3 T 2 72 Lower LH to point IF T 1 U 3 0 THEN U2 90 GOTO 2580 If point is over lower LH then angle 90 U2 ATN T 2 V 3 T 1 U 3 Else calculate angle IF U2 l
130. SP How many channels are to be DISP monitored by voltmeter 4 max INPUT T1 T1 IP T1 IF T1 gt 0 AND T1 lt 5 THEN 1520 CLEAR BEEP DISP Please choose a number from 1 DISP to 4 WAIT 4500 GOTO 1420 FOR I 69 TO 70 T1 STEP 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the channel number and the DISP voltage range DISP DISP 1V 1 1V 2 10V 3 INPUT U V U IP U V IP V IF U gt 1 AND U lt 1000 THEN 1630 CLEAR BEEP DISP Please enter a number 0 999 WAIT 4500 GOTO 1530 IF V gt 0 AND V lt 4 THEN 1670 CLEAR BEEP DISP Please enter a number 1 3 WAIT 4500 GOTO 1530 FOR J 69 TO I STEP 1 IF T 1 J U THEN 1730 CLEAR BEEP DISP You have already chosen that DISP channel Please enter another WAIT 4500 GOTO 1530 111 Input of chan Make integer Chan valid No notify user Re enter of chan Yes cont Channel voltage rng Make integers Channel valid No notify user Re enter chan rng Yes voltage rng valid No notify user t Re enter chan rng Yes chk entries Entered previously Yes notify user Re enter chan rng 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 NEXT J T 1 1 U T 2 I v NEXT I T2 1 RETURN REM REM REM NORMALIZATION
131. TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION eeusv9eesese s SYSTEM STARTUP 2 1 Overview 2 2 Setup and Error Prevention 2 3 Unusual Error Actions 2 4 Reference oooooooo oo o aie ara tes Seely a atone ee sana es CENTRAL PROGRAM CONTROL oo oooooooooococoooonnoooonooo 3 1 Overview eee DEES NS Vea oS eA sles awe nwd 3 2 Input TYPES hiss ba is aa a a 3 3 Initializ ti jae ea oh we tee bees aes SoA Main Program ii A ORR eR 3 5 Data ACQUISICI ON iscsi AAA Sow ke RS 3 6 Equipment Availability and Error Handling ES 3 7 Unusual Error ActionS ee er eee ras 3 7 1 Insufficient Power AA 3 7 2 Incorrect Address eee ee ee 3 7 3 Hardware FAs lure cir Si eee Saeed SS 3 8 Normal OpG rations s dcir 66 0s 6A ei RE a ess 329 ROEGYTONCO ora ia eee ee SG A Ea MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING PACKAGE ooooooooooooooooooo o Md OVOCVI GW iio A BN A 4 2 Main ProgIaM o oooooooocooonornsososcrrosasssns 4 3 PLOCESSING oli cic kore RTC 6 OSES SE i OES 6 ESSE BOT Lai ROAQ ii ARANDAS RR AA A eee 4 3 2 Sort Interpolate and Evaluate 4 3 3 Time Integral lt lt o lt cocosocnanas 4 4 StoraQl oooooooooooooooonomoococonorcrrarosonsorso 4 5 Completi0N o oooooooooooconccccorocnonanannn non 4 6 ReferenCe o o ooooooooonoroocoroooomonrorono nao PLOTTING PACKAGE ooooooooooooorooncorononononsos oo ooo
132. Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer was developed as a single shot transient digitizer Therefore the NORML program was written to simulate a normal oscilloscope The NORML program continuously arms and triggers the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer to simulate a free running state To change settings on the digitizer the operator pauses the program makes the desired changes and continues the program dt BE ae Soke os 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM NORMAL O SCOPE 7612D 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 6 10 85 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 REM Chuck Graves wizard 90 REM 100 REM 110 COM X 10 120 REMOTE 7 130 SEND 7 140 OUTPUT 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 WRI ON 150 CLEAR BEEP 160 DISP Press when necessary 170 DISP DISP K1 Pause to adjust settings 180 DISP K2 190 ON KEY 1 Finished PAUSE GOTO 260 200 ON KEY 2 FINIS GOTO 300 210 KEY LABEL 220 SEND 7 230 OUTPUT 7 240 WAIT 90 250 GOTO 220 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 ARM A B MTRIG 260 CLEAR BEEP 270 DISP Adjust settings and press CONT 280 LOCAL 7 PAUSE 290 REMOTE 7 Q GOTO 150 300 CLEAR Q BEEP 310 DISP MISSION CONTROL 320 DISP will now resume control 330 FOR I 1 TO 65 340 BEEP 65 1 20 143 Make file name common Control HPIB Listener 7612D Set 7612D data rdy SRQ Display program options Change settings option Finished option List
133. The program asks for the title for the x axis then the program asks for 235 the title of the y axis After verifying the titles are not too long PLOT asks the operator for a preference of grid or graph Next the program prompts the operator to load the plotter and pauses Once the plotter is loaded press CONTINUE PLOT will take the x per division and y per division information from the control register if file is unprocessed or calculate the y per division if processed and round the values to the nearest value of 1 2 25 5 1 2 2 5 10 20 25 or 50 The program will evaluate the unit values to the nearest engineering unit e g 10 3 y gives 1 mV 103 y gives 1 kV Using these values the program will draw and label the grid or graph and begin reading the data from the file l Since PLOT has a limited space for data storage the program will carry out the plot in segments of 2048 points The program will read the first segment then plot it read the second segment then plot it and so on After completing the plot PLOT will label the x axis and the y axis The program will prompt for the desired location on the plot for the date and time the curve was taken The program then asks for the year and plots the date and time at the desired y coordinate Next PLOT asks for a label to put on the graph This is any name the operator wants to put on the plot to use as a general title This is as a supplement to the axes
134. UE PAUSE IF P1 8 THEN 540 CLEAR BEEP DISP This program can handle only 4 DISP curves per run Please do over WAIT 4500 GOSUB 1300 GOTO 230 IF P1 1 THEN 680 GOSUB 1780 FOR I 1 TO 7 B I Z 1 NEXT I IF Pl 2 THEN 680 GOSUB 1780 FOR I 1 TO 7 C I Z 1 NEXT I GOSUB 1780 FOR I 1 TO 7 D I 2 1 NEXT I CLEAR 7 S1 4096 P1 P 1 3 DATE P 2 3 TIME Store start date time 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 IOBUFFER D OUTPUT 715 D3D2 TRANSFER 714 TO DS FHS EOI CLEAR BEEP DISP Kl Store all data DISP K2 Process new set DISP K3 Finished ON KEY 1 STORE GOTO 1940 ON KEY 2 NEW SET GOTO 830 ON KEY 3 FINIS GOTO 840 109 Declare I O buffer Fast transfer data Disp program options Store option New data option Finished option KEY LABEL GOTO 820 Loop until choice N Y Set new data flag IF S Y THEN 900 Data stored flag CLEAR BEEP No ask user DISP Have you stored the present set DISP of curves Y N INPUT S Data stored IF S Y THEN 1940 No store data IF N Y THEN 140 Yes restart process if new data flag is set CLEAR BEEP DISP Do you wish to digitize another DISP set of curves Y N INPUT N Digitize more data IF N Y THEN 140 Yes repeat process IF V Y THEN CHA
135. X 2 512 Y 2 512 U 4 V 4 T 3 SHORT P 3 5 M 2 N 2 DIM P 25 D 25 DEG CLEAR BEEP DISP Initializing GOSUB 980 GOSUB 1270 CLEAR BEEP DISP How many curves will be entered DISP 1 2 INPUT Q IF Q 1 OR Q 2 THEN 280 CLEAR BEEP DISP Please choose 1 or 2 WAIT 4500 GOTO 200 CLEAR BEEP OUTPUT 706 BP42 125 5 DISP Please digitize the corners of DISP the graph grid in the following DISP order upper left upper right DISP lower left and lower right FOR I 1 TO 4 GOSUB 1540 146 Make file name common Initialization routine Visual aid routine Input of curves of curves valid No notify user Re enter of curves Yes cont t Generate tone Digitization routine 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 147 IF NOT S OR B 7 THEN 350 t If no digitization or softkey digitized then repeat process U I F 1 Store x value V 1 T 2 Store y value NEXT I GOSUB 1880 Correction routine FOR I 1 TO Q P1 I CLEAR BEEP Display prog options DISP Digitize curve VAL I DISP DISP Kl End of curve DISP K2 Store all data DISP K3 Process new set DISP K4 Finished DISP K5 Print device data ON KEY 1 END GOTO 670 End of curve option ON KEY 2 STORE GOTO 2610 Sto
136. YSTEM STARTUP 2 1 Overview The systems software package is controlled by a central processing program Autost This program is outlined more thoroughly in Chapter 3 but a brief overview is useful at this time The principal duties of Autost are 1 initialization of the system clock and calendar 2 polling devices to see if they are present on the interface bus and most importantly 3 loading and running the necessary programs for the specific data acquisition processes This program is designed so that the operator need only select from menus of desired functions or equipment The program handles the rest of the housekeeping and organization 2 2 Setup and Error Prevention For a smooth system startup the operator only need follow a short series of operations to load and run Autost 1 turn on the disk drive 2 insert the SYSTEMS MASTER disk into drive 00 3 turn on the HP 85 computer 4 type CHAIN Autost 5 press ENDLINE If the computer is turned on first the computer will generate ERROR 131 CARTRIDGE OUT Since the computer has a Mass Storage ROM the computer polls the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HPIB for a mass storage device If it finds none the computer defaults to its internal tape drive By turning on the disk drive first the computer has a mass storage device on line and assigns the disk drive to be the system s mass storage unit 2 3 Unusual Error Actions On rare occasions the computer does not rec
137. a Wait for next meas t Set cont branch Sound alarm 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 GOSUB 1780 CLEAR BEEP DISP There are P1 curves FOR I 1 TO Pl 100 Assign mass storage Store single curves DISP Enter the name for curve VALS 1 INPUT X P I 4 T2 IF LEN X gt 0 AND LEN X lt 11 THEN 1190 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Pick a name DISP with less than 11 letters WAIT 4500 CLEAR BEEP GOTO 1100 CLEAR BEEP DISP Storing data in x GOSUB 1920 CLEAR BEEP NEXT I DISP Do you want to take another set DISP of data Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN 1310 CLEAR BEEP DISP Re initializing GOTO 150 CLEAR BEEP DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 I 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 END REM REM Enter file name Set data pts Name too large Yes notify user Re enter file name No cont Store data More data Yes re initialize Repeat process No return to Autost Load Autost prog 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 REM
138. ace OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO X Open file PRINT 1 1 1 of curves in file PRINT 1 2 10 of horiz divisions PRINT 1 3 8 of vert divisions PRINT 1 4 T 1 t start time for meas PRINT 1 5 T 2 date of measurement GOSUB 2380 Get channel conversion GOSUB 2690 Calculate cntl values K 6 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 FOR J 1 TO 5 PRINT 1 K P I J K K 1 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO P I 4 PRINT 1 K X I J PRINT 1 K P 1 4 Y I J M K K 1 NEXT J ASSIGN 1 TO RETURN OFF ERROR IF ERRN 63 THEN 2330 CLEAR BEEP DISP File already exists Do you want DISP to purge Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN PURGE X GOTO 2000 CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter another name INPUT X GOTO 1990 IF ERRN 130 THEN 2000 CLEAR BEEP DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 GOTO 1060 REM REM REM CONVERSION SUBROUTINE REM 1 SCALE INPUT REM REM CLEAR BEEP M 1 DISP Is an attenuator current 103 Store cntl values Store time values Store magnitude values Stored time array then magn array Close file File already exist Yes notify user Purge existing file Yes purge amp cont No enter new name Retry storage Disk error no retry Yes notify user Re assig
139. ack in plot mode and returns to the key operations 2 8 Reference A complete outline of PLOT is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 300 through 318 237 CHAPTER 6 I VS V PLOTTING PACKAGE 1 Overview The SYSTEMS package contains a program I V which plots only I vs V curves Initially this program was a subroutine in PLOT However the space available in memory in the HP 85 is limited Therefore the necessity arose to make this function a separate program As a result I Y functions in essentially the same manner as PLOT The basic difference between I V and PLOT is the operator has one 1 plot that can be generated in I Y where the operator had a choice of four 4 in PLOT In addition I V does not contain the option of generating second breakdown characteristics 2 Action Otherwise I V is functionally equivalent to PLOT Therefore the operator will find system discussion from Chapter 5 to be most useful To avoid redundancy the operator is referred to sections 5 2 through 5 6 for a discussion of system operations 6 3 Reference A complete outline of I V is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 320 through 327 238 CHAPTER 7 USING TEKTRONIX 7612D AS A STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE 1 1 Overview The SYSTEMS package has the capabilities to use several data takers One such device is the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer The device was designed primarily as a single shot storage device Ho
140. am is finished by generating an alarm sequence To continue the program the operator presses K1 10 4 Data Storage HP DAS will ask where the operator wants the data stored Then the program will ask for a file name The file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a file name the program will ask the operator to enter a valid name After receiving a valid file name HP DAS notifies the operator the data is being stored 10 4 1 File Creation Errors HP DAS will attempt to create a file for storage At this point two 2 common errors arise One 1 is a duplicate file error This arises when the program attempts to create a file that already exists on the mass storage device The program will notify the user of the error HP DAS then asks whether or not the operator wishes to purge the existing file If so HP DAS will purge the existing file and create the file for storage Otherwise the program will ask for a new file name With a new file name the program will try to create a file again The second common error arises from a problem with the mass storage device Typically the problem arises from telling HP DAS to create a file on a mass storage device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage and return to the beginning of the data storage process On rare occasions other errors may arise If this occur
141. and voltage range Wait 4500 Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect Are entries valid Notify user entries incorrect Yes Ht 356 Wait 4500 Enter time between each sample Notify user entry incorrect Enter total time Wait 4500 Notify user to sample over entry incorrect Initialize MUX amp VM Store date Store time Enter voltage Trigger VM Wait 500 Set voltage range Set channel 35 Notify user taking data Store start time 7 there another channel Notify user program waiting Wait sample time Is Notify user total time up data storing yet Yes Wait 4500 Notify user that Notify user file name is too long program is finished Enter mass storage Enter file name Is name too No long 359 Create file Wait 4500 Notify user to pick Is there an new mass storage Yes Turn off error error Yes No Is Is Q error No error 63 130 No Notify user of Notify user of duplicate name unusual error you want to Purge duplicate purge file from storage Notify user to enter new file name QO A Do you 4 Hs Assign buffer to want to take more data No there another mass storage file No channel Store control Load and run Aut
142. areas are programmed to indicate menu selections in the operation of the system All digitized data are transferred to the computer The assignment of the softkeys and the storage of the digitized points is under software control The one disadvantage of the tablet may be its mode of operation The tablet uses field strength to approximate the pen s location If the pen is depressed over a conductive material e g pencil lead the field is distorted Thus the tablet could take an inaccurate measurement Investigation of this effect showed that the tablet interpreted the center of the conductive area to be the pen s location Thus if a 1 x 1 piece of conductive material was placed on the tablet digitizing almost any location on that area produced the same result coordinates associated with the center Care is required therefore not to use conductive materials on the tablet 2 3 pata St Capabiliti In addition to the data acquisition capabilities described a data acquisition system needed mass storage capabilities The computer chosen for the central processor of the system was an HP85 desktop computer This decision was based upon availability of the machine and ease of programming In addition the computer had a built in mass storage unit a magnetic tape drive However storage and access of data using a magnetic tape tended to be rather time consuming Therefore an additional mass storage unit was chosen the HP9895A Flexible Disk
143. arily for its print capabilities In several of the software packages the printer is used to create hardcopy output for the operator In addition the graphic display can be dumped to the printer plotter However the graphic display performs a direct dump to the printer plotter Therefore the resulting plot was limited to the resolution obtainable on the computer s small screen In contrast the plots which can be generated on the HP7470A Plotter are high resolution Therefore all hardcopy plots are created using the plotter Also the plotter is used as a slow printer The software 13 to be discussed later uses the plotter in a print mode to list second breakdown characteristics based upon the processed data files A further preference for the plotter arose from the printer plotter paper lifetime Any hardcopy saved on the thermal paper used by the computer was found to fade over time This fading did not require extended exposure to light but appeared to require only time Thus hardcopies made with the plotter on normal typing paper have a longer lifetime while hardcopies made on the thermal printer plotter paper disappear after several months A final requirement of the system was the development of software to carry out limited calculations The software which carried out these operations is described in detail in Chapter 3 In brief the software was developed to compute instantaneous power given a current curve and a voltage c
144. art in 2048 of Pmax using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and 3 one 1 part in 64 of Pmax using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer These error terms represent twice that of their respective voltage and current error terms The corresponding error term for the HP Graphics Tablet is one 1 part in 1600 of Pmax The energy is calculated by summing over the areas described by the equation A 5 Xi41 Xi Yi 1 Yq 74 which was derived in section 3 4 For data taken using the HP Graphics Tablet the area is given as Ami 1 Aj 1 A4Aj41 5 tip t t ty At Pj47 AP P AP 5 tq4 ty 2At Pj41 Py 2AP 5 ti 1 ty P44 Py At Pj47 Py AP t344 ty 2AtAP As was noted earlier the term 2AtAP represents a second order error and can be disregarded Thus the equation becomes Ami 1 7 5 ti 1 ti Pi Pi At Py41 Py AP ti41 ti The energy is a sum over this equation for all i So the energy is represented as Em E AE 2 5 ti 1 gt ti Pig Pi At Paga Pi t AP ty41 t4 5 ti 1 ty Pi 1 Pi E At Pi 1 Pi AP ti47 t4 so that AE At Pji41 Py AP ty4 t3 This can be represented as two 2 separate sums AE At P41 Py LAP ty4 ty Since At and AP are constants the expression can be rewritten AE At P34 Py APL ty41 ti The first sum reduces to Pm Py and the second sum reduces to tm tz The initial val
145. ased upon the same considerations as noted in section 3 3 2 This data acquisition process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 2 3 a sample experiment is performed with the human machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program 7612D including computer prompts and operator responses For further details regarding this program refer to 1 Appendix A Program Listings 7612D and 2 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 7 Using Tektronix 7612D As A Single shot O scope 3 2 4 Very Fast Measurement Subsystem Hand Entry The very fast measurement subsystem was developed using the HP85 Desktop Computer the HP9895A Flexible Disk and the HP9111A Graphics Tablet These units are tied together using the software package named TABLET Figure 3 4 shows the block diagram of the very fast measurement subsystem Unlike the preceding three 3 subsystems this data acquisition subsystem was not designed to control a real time data taker Instead this subsystem is centered around a hand entry digitizer The software was developed to input two 2 curves with 512 points per curve The operator attachs a piece of data to the graphics tablet The operator then is prompted to enter the four 4 corners of the graph These allow the software to correct the input data for rotational and translational offsets 23 HP9111A OAL Graphics Tablet HP Interface Bus HPIB
146. associated with the operation of the HP Graphics Tablet have been ignored This is due to the fact that establishing a benchmark for a hand operated digitization device is difficult The HP Graphics Tablet has an elemental grid whose dimensions are 12032 by 8710 units on a matrix which is 301 mm by 218 mm This grid structure corresponds to a placement of one 1 element every 025 mm The manufacturer claims this grid can resolve pen placement to 1 mm The principle difficulty in validating the resolution of the HP Graphics Tablet is that the resolution is greater than that obtainable by a human Therefore the accuracy of the HP Graphics Tablet is presumed to be that given by the manufacturer For the described grid one 1 part in 12032 is slightly less than 14 bit accuracy so that 13 bit accuracy will be used for the HP Graphics Tablet However there is a difficulty associated with the operation of the HP Graphics Tablet This difficulty is inherent to the physics of the 69 digitization process The location of the pen on the platen is evaluated using the gradient of the electric field As such the process is very sensitive to any conductive materials on the platen Therefore the user is warned to take care not to use any materials which are electically conductive This includes graphite pencil leads some eraseable pen inks and films using a conductive emulsion Any of these materials will degrade the resolution of the HP Graphics Table
147. ast significant bit LSB Gain error is the difference between the actual input voltage and the theoretical input voltage for a full scale output code This phenomena can be attributed to errors in reference voltage ladder resistance values or amplifier gain Under these circumstances some bit s in an A D converter ADC would require a larger or smaller step to set the bit s Thus the value associated with the output code is not uniformly weighted Offset zero error is the required mean value of input voltage to set the output code to zero 0 This error corresponds to some DC offset in the measurement which is due not to the desired channel rather the output code reflects an artifact of the measurement setup This error however is removed using software Under software control a measurement is taken with the input grounded This provides a non zero trace which corresponds to the offset error The offset error is averaged and removed from the actual measurement by numerical means Hysteresis error causes the voltage at which a code transition occurs to be dependent upon the direction from which the transition is approached Thus the thresholds associated with each range boundary are dependent upon the direction from which the range is entered For example if the range to produce code 1011 is from 01 to 02 mV one would expect the code to change from 10109 to 10119 at 01 mV for an increasing function and from 10119 to 10109 at
148. ata files are stored in slightly different formats described in detail in Appendix C the program has to know how to read the data and which data to read Once the computer receives an input for a valid curve the software enters that storage file The program was developed to accept one 1 curve with a maximum size of 2048 points The program then requests the operator for the axis titles the graph title and the location for the graph title With this information the software generates a plot on the plotter in the chosen format The operator has the option to choose between a format of all plots on a single sheet of paper or a single plot per sheet of paper In addition the size of these plots can be changed by the operator at the keyboard In support of the second breakdown SB characteristic studies the program was developed with the ability to generate a printout of the SB characteristics This printout is generated on the plotter by placing the plotter in a print mode and outputting as though it were a printer The software finds or calculates values for 1 voltage at second breakdown 2 current at second breakdown 3 power at second breakdown 4 energy at second breakdown 5 time at second breakdown 6 time To when voltage represents 10 of second breakdown voltage 7 voltage at To 8 current at To 9 power at Tp 10 energy at T 11 time from To to second breakdown and 12 change in energy from T to second breakd
149. ata in files which can be processed in the future If no auxiliary data was taken 7612D will return to Autost 247 8 6 Reference A complete outline of 7612D is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 331 through 343 248 CHAPTER 9 NICOLET DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPE CONTROL PACKAGE 2 1 Overview The Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope referred to hereafter as the Nicolet is set up much more like a normal oscilloscope Where the Tektronix 7612D needed a program to simulate normal oscilloscope action the Nicolet was developed as an oscilloscope with normal properties The Nicolet however is not capable of the digitizing rate which the Tektronix 7612D can achieve In many areas the Nicolet is not as flexible as the Tektronix 7612D however the Nicolet has much more flexibility in its storage capabilities The operator is referred to the Nicolet s user s manual for specific device capabilities The software controlling the Nicolet is a highly modified version of a software package purchased from Software Consulting Group The program NIC85 will store up to four 4 curves with 1024 points per curve Much like the program for the Tektronix 7612D NIC85 allows the operator to make auxiliary measurements with the system multiplexer and system voltmeter However the program is less interactive with the operator NIC85 does not have the zero 0 compensation capabilities of 7612D NIC85 does have the true unit computation 9 2 Main Program
150. d error types 1 stuck bits and 2 non linear beam sweep These two 2 errors will be indicated by a lack of monotonicity and a repetitive unequal bit pattern respectively The non linear beam sweep should it 68 occur would be comparable in appearance to the gain error mentioned in the previous sections First the monotonicity of the waveform was examined For a 256 point measurement there were four 4 points where the waveform was non monotonic Two 2 of those four 4 points were measured in the same neighborhood approximately the same value An error rate of four 4 in 256 samples is equivalent to one 1 in 64 Thus for one 1 in every 64 points the accuracy is reduced to seven 7 bits For the remaining 63 of every 64 points the accuracy is eight 8 bits This represents an average value of slightly less than eight 8 bits Therefore the accuracy of the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer will be taken to be seven 7 bits for worst case considerations Finally the data was examined for evidence of a non linear beam sweep There was no indication of a repetitive unequal bit pattern such as that described for a gain error in the standard A D conversions Therefore when the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer is operated at a sampling time of approximately 50 ns the user can anticipate that the accuracy of the instrument will be seven 7 bits 2 2 7 HP Graphics Tablet Measurements In the previous sections the errors
151. data read into the computer The program interpolates linearly the voltage and current data onto this time frame Then the power and energy curves associated with the voltage and current curves The MATH program calculates the instantaneous power curve by taking the product of the voltage and current values The energy curve is calculated by performing an integration of the power curve using a trapezoidal approximation Finally the MATH program stores the processed data files The curves are stored in the order 1 time 2 voltage 3 current 4 power 5 energy 192 10 REM 20 REM MATH PACKAGE 30 REM MAIN PROGRAM 40 REM 50 REM Copyright 10 25 84 60 REM gandalf software inc 70 REM Chuck Graves wizard 80 REM 90 REM 100 COM x 10 Make file name common 110 SHORT X 2048 Y 256 2 256 M 4 256 P 3 5 R 2 2 120 GOSUB 2970 Initialization routine 130 IF X NULL THEN 180 Math first program 140 CLEAR BEEP Yes enter file name 150 DISP What is the name of the file 160 INPUT X 170 IF LEN X gt 10 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 WAIT 4500 GOTO 140 If name is too long notify user and re enter file name CLEAR BEEP DISP Where is X stored DISP TAPE DISK00 DISKO01 INPUT R Input mass storage GOSUB 2470 Mass storage routine ON ERROR GOTO 1760 Trap fil
152. data storage cycle section 11 5 Otherwise the program will ask whether or not the operator wishes to digitize another set of curves 265 If the operator wishes to digitize another set of curves TABLET will return to the beginning of the main program section 11 3 and wait for the operator to finish with the data preparation section 11 2 Otherwise the program will return to Autost 11 9 Reference A complete outline of TABLET is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 362 through 374 266 CHAPTER 12 AUXILIARY FORMATTING PACKAGE 12 1 Overview In Chapters 8 and 9 the program controlling the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and the Nicolet 4090 III Digital Oscilloscope were discussed In both of those programs the operator is afforded the opportunity to take auxiliary data using the HP3497A DAS Control Unit and the HP3437A System Voltmeter In both cases however due to the restricted program space in the computer a unique data format was developed for temporary storage of the data Since the data format is not consistent with the remainder of the data stored by the system an extra program YMAUX was developed to reformat and store the data obtained from the system multiplexer and the system voltmeter This program was referred to on pages 246 250 and 253 YMAUX reads the data stored in the auxiliary format and restores the data in the normal data format During the processing the program also allows
153. data to be stored Then if the operator is storing two 2 curves TABLET will see if the two 2 curves are the same type e g both curves are voltage If the curves are the same the program notifies the operator of the error and asks whether or not the operator wants to store the curves separately If the operator does not wish to store the curves separately TABLET returns to the main program setup section 11 3 1 where the program asks for the value per division entries Otherwise the operator is notified the curves will be stored in the order curve one 1 then curve two 2 a software flag is set to indicate the curves will be stored separately If the curves are not the same or are flagged to be separated or only one 1 curve is to be stored TABLET will notify the operator the data is being stored 11 5 1 File Creation Errors TABLET will attempt to create a file for storage At this point two 2 common errors arise One 1 is a duplicate file error This 263 arises when the program attempts to create a file that already exists on the mass storage device The program will notify the user of the error TABLET then asks whether or not the operator wishes to purge the existing file If so TABLET will purge the existing file and create the file for storage Otherwise the program will ask for a new file name With a new file name the program will try to create a file again The second common error arises from a probl
154. divisions vert divisions date start time cntl reg If another curve then set values and store other cntl reg T 2 65 TIME F E IF F 1 THEN H A 7 IF F 2 THEN H B 7 IF F 3 THEN H C 7 IF F 4 THEN H D 7 IF Pl 1 THEN R 4 IF Pl 2 THEN R 2 FOR I F TO R 1024 STEP R X H IP I F R PRINT 1 K X Store aux start time Use time norm 1 Use time norm 2 Use time norm 3 Use time norm 4 If 1 curve every 4th If 2 curves every 2nd Calculate time Store time 115 2750 K K 1 2760 IF FP IP I F R 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB 3200 Take desired auxiliary data if n 256th operation 2770 NEXT I 2780 IF E F THEN PRINT 1 6 X 10 Store time div curve 1 2790 IF E F THEN PRINT 1 11 X 10 Store time div curve 2 2800 IF F G THEN F G GOTO 2660 If another curve set values and repeat process 2810 F E 2820 IF F 1 THEN H A 6 Use voltage norm 1 2830 IF F 2 THEN H B 6 Use voltage norm 2 2840 IF F 3 THEN H C 6 Use voltage norm 3 2850 IF F 4 THEN H D 6 Use voltage norm 4 2860 FOR I 2 F 1 TO R 2048 STEP 2 R 2870 Y 256 NUM DS I 1 NUM DS 1 1 1 1 H M Calculate voltage D 1 1 upper byte 8 bit ASCII D 1 1 1 1 lower byte 8 bit ASCII H normalization factor M scale factor 2880 IF BIT NUM D 1 1 7 THEN Y Y 256 2 H M Convert number for negative value 2890 PRINT 1 K Y Store voltage 2900 K K 1 2910 IF FP IP I F 2 R 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB
155. down for time t at 10 of second breakdown voltage for voltage current power and energy at time to for time from to to second breakdown for change in energy from t to second breakdown 300 Initialize registers Set defaults Notify user file Wait 4500 name is too long Is file name known Is file name Enter mass storage Assign buffer to Cca c2 mass storage file Enter file name too long 301 Is Turn off error Is there an Yes Yes error error 130 os No No Read control register new mass storage Choose function Wait 4500 c2 Plot voltage curve cs Plot current curve cs Plot power curve c7 Plot energy curve cs Scale plot co E a unusual error Notify user to pick Notify user there a voltage only current curve Wait 4500 curve Set flags for voltage curve Notify user only voltage curve Wait 4500 curve Set flags for current curve there a power Notify user no power curve Wait 4500 curve Set flags for power curve Notify user no there a energy energy curve Wait 4500 curve Set flags for energy curve 304 Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect Load and run Enter new file name
156. e Y which brings about the following interchange How many channels are to be monitored by voltmeter 4 max 2 Enter the channel number and the voltage range 00 2 Enter the channel number and the voltage range 01 2 When the operator responds N to the prompt for the system voltmeter or the entries for use of the system voltmeter are completed the program prompts Set up Nicolet and take measurement When you have the curve you wish to store press CONTINUE After the operator acquires a desirable curve the computer is notified The program then warns the operator of the restrictions associated with this software The processing package can handle no more than 1024 data 36 per curve Therefore only 1024 of the data will be used by the processing program This is equivalent to using Q1 to Q4 To view what will be processed turn the MEMORY switch to Q3 To resume restore MEMORY to ALL and press CONTINUE When the computer is notified that a good measurement had been taken the software proceeds to load the normalization factors and the curve data from the Nicolet Then the software displays the available options K1 Store all data K2 Process new set K3 Finished If the operator first seeks to store the data acquired the software prompts the operator for the name and storage location for the file What name do you want for the storage file NICTST Where do you want the curves stored DISK00
157. e So conversion is 2V to DISP 1V entered 2V 1V Enter DISP using scientific notation and DISP include units A or V INPUT W1 015 Input conversion I POS W1 A l Posn for current IF I 0 THEN I POS W1 v or posn for voltage IF I 0 THEN 4190 I or V CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP Please redo and include the DISP appropriate units A or V WAIT 4500 GOTO 4000 J POS Q1 v Posn for voltage IF J 0 THEN 4250 Voltage CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP The right hand t r should be DISP a voltage term WAIT 4500 GOTO 4000 Re enter conversion IF Q F THEN M VAL W1 VAL Q1 P 1 5 NUM W1 LEN W1 LEN W1 Set curve 1 conversions IF Q G THEN N VAL W1 VAL Q1 P 2 5 NUM W1S LEN W1 LEN W1 Set curve 2 conversions IF E F G THEN Q G GOTO 4000 Repeat for 20d conver RETURN 120 7612D The 7612D program controls the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and if desired the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM The digitizer is used to make up to two 2 1024 point measurements The operator enters the measurement settings on the front panel of the digitizer The program loads these settings and asks the operator for verification Then the program arms the digitizer for a measurement Once a good measurement is acquired the program stores the data The DACU and DVM are used to take measure
158. e based upon the time regimes described in Chapter 2 Separated by time regime again are the data acquisition areas 1 slow measurements 2 intermediate measurements 3 fast measurements 4 very fast measurements and other hand entries Each of these areas are covered by a subsystem configured around the equipment described in Chapter 2 In addition to the requirements described in Chapter 2 a desire was expressed to monitor slowly changing phenomena during tests using the 15 16 fast and intermediate measurement subsystems As will be pointed out in the following sections the fast and intermediate measurements take a relatively short time for acquisition and transfer However the data storage process transfer from computer to data storage media takes a great deal longer During this time slowly changing phenomena such as temperature can be monitored using the slow measurement system In the following text each of the subsystems will be examined in detail 3 2 Data Acquisition Subsystems As described in Chapter 2 there were four 4 separate time regimes which were needed for the complete development of this data acquisition and conditioning system Discrete subsystems were designed for each of these time regimes These subsystems are composed of 1 the system component s described in the appropriate section in Chapter 2 e g slow measurement system components are the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit and the HP3437A
159. e error ASSIGN 1 TO X Open file OFF ERROR READ 1 1 Pl Read of curves IF Pl 2 THEN 380 Two files CLEAR BEEP No notify user DISP This program is developed for DISP the multiplication and DISP integration of two curves This DISP program cannot process this file DISP Would you like to work on a 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 DISP different set of curves Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN 140 GOTO 1680 IF P 1 4 lt 1024 AND P 2 4 lt 1024 THEN 460 CLEAR BEEP DISP The file is too large This DISP can process a maximum of 1024 DISP points Would you like to work DISP on a different set of curves Y N GOTO 350 READ 1 2 READ 1 3 DISP P 3 1 P 3 2 K 6 FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 5 READ 1 K P 1 J K K 1 NEXT J NEXT I READ 1 4 P 1 3 READ 1 5 P 2 3 CLEAR BEEP DISP Sorting GOSUB 2220 A R 1 2 R 1 1 B A 256 IF IP B B THEN Q1 B GOTO 640 Q1 IP B 1 A R 2 2 R 2 1 B A 256 IF IP B B THEN Q2 B GOTO 680 Q2 IP B 1 CLEAR BEEP 193 Different curves Yes restart process No return to Autost Is file too large Yes notify user Branch back for curves No read of horiz div Read of vert div Read control registers Read date Read time Sort routine A of pts c
160. e identified by a repetitive unequal bit pattern with a length greater than two bits This type of pattern was not observed Therefore the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope is presumed to have no appreciable gain error Next the monotonicity of the data was examined Again there was no indication of error Since the data was monotonic it can be inferred that linearity is within the constraints of 1 1 2 least significant bit and that there were no stuck bits during the measurement Finally the symmetry of the data was examined If a hysteresis error existed the symmetry of the data would be perturbed Again there was no indication of an error Therefore the errors associated with the A D conversion of the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope are within theoretical limits This indicates that the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope was operating at the accuracy claimed by the manufacturer The accuracy claimed by Nicolet for this particular scope and plug ins is 12 bits 5 2 6 Tek ix P ble Digiti Measurements Finally a triangular waveform was measured using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer This measurement was patterned after the previously described measurements In this case the waveform was a 4 volt triangular wave with a frequency of approximately 80 kHz This waveform was digitized approximately once every 50 ns This data was then examined for the errors described in section 5 2 3 Unlike the previous tests there are only two 2 anticipate
161. e more data NIC85 will return to the main program set up section 9 2 Otherwise the program will load and run one 1 of two 2 programs If auxiliary data was taken using the system multiplexer and system voltmeter the program will load and run VMAUX VMAUX is a supplementary program discussed in Chapter 12 This program takes care of separating reformatting and restoring the auxiliary data in files which can be processed in the future If no auxiliary data was taken NIC85 will return to Autost 2 5 Data Storage Setup NIC85 will ask for a file name The file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a file name the program will ask the operator to enter a valid name Next the program will ask where the operator wants the data stored If there are more than two 2 curves NIC85 will ask the operator which curves are to be paired together This is done since the processing package MATH cannot process more than two 2 curves at a time The operator can opt to store the curves separately as well as in pairs 9 6 T Unit c tati NIC85 asks whether or not a device other than a voltage probe is use If so the program asks for the curve s with some conversion process The program asks for the particular conversion process on a given curve NIC85 will accept only a voltage to voltage or current to voltage conversion process The program was not written for conversion processes such as temperatur
162. e of data files and time from measurement to storage These limitations are covered during the operation of the individual programs so the operator is reminded without causing any undue problems This manual is an effort to catalog the capabilities and limitations of the systems software package The operator should read this to gain a preliminary view of the system The first chapter is an overview of system operations providing step by step instructions for starting the system and taking measurements The succeeding chapters provide step by step instructions for preparing making and storing measurements on each of the instruments in the system The final chapter covers data storage format In addition appendices are provided for aiding the user should any unusual circumstances arise during the operation of the system including flow charts for each of the programs and a copy of the HP 85 error codes Please keep in mind this manual assumes the operator is familiar with the instrument being used for measurement To receive better results in the operation of this system the operator is recommended to first make a series of simple measurements with the test instrument 222 without the aid of the system This exercise should provide valuable insight into the operation of the experiment In conclusion do not hesitate to refer to the manuals on each instrument if there is any doubt about the validity of the measurement 223 CHAPTER 2 S
163. e same settings and attempt to take another sweep by arming the time base s again Once the program is notified that the operator wishes the curve to be stored the software will ask where to store the file and under what name Where do you want the curves stored DISK00 DISK01 TAPE DISK00 What name do you want for the storage file TRNTST Once the program has a file name and storage location the program will proceed to store the data Until the data storage cycle is completed the software will display the message Storing data in TRNTST Once the program has completed storing the normal curve data the program will prompt for the name of the auxiliary voltage data What name do you want for the auxiliary file TRNAUX This is stored temporarily in the same way as the auxiliary voltage measurements from the intermediate measurement subsystem Thus VMAUX will be called later Once the program has a name for the auxiliary file the software proceeds to store Storing data in TRNAUX Data is stored After completing the auxiliary storage cycle the program will ask Do you want to take another set of data Y N If the operator chooses to take another set of curves then the entry is made Y Whereupon the software returns to the acquisition beginning with the initialization If on the other hand the operator is finished with 45 the acquisition process then the entry is N At that point the software will load and run one of two p
164. e sample period tg with an associated error term of At The time resolution associated with the HP System Voltmeter is set by the timing of the HP 85 Computer The computer timing command WAIT has a resolution of 1 ms This yields a worst case resolution for the computer of 1 ms In addition the algorithm controlling the HP System Voltmeter includes a wait state of 5 s to allow the voltage being measured to settle This yields a worst case error term of 1 ms in 5 s which corresponds to one 1 part in 500 For the more general case there will be a programmed delay chosen by the user which will add to the 5 s Therefore the error term is one 1 part in 500 tg where ts is expressed in milliseconds According to the manufacturer the error term associated with the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope is 01 of the sample period This yields an error term of one 1 part in 10000 of tg 71 According to the manufacturer the error term associated with the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer is 0035 of the time base frequency 200 MHz This yields an error term of 175 ps This error term is the same for all sample period settings because they are all based on the same single frequency clock The time resolution associated with the HP Graphics Tablet is in terms of the total time however the total time is dependent upon the physical size of the data being digitized Since the digitized time data is not necessarily evenly spaced as in the other
165. e security types must be entered one 1 at a time Therefore to remove both the overwrite protection and the duplicate protection for the program file Autost two 2 separate UNSECURE commands will have to be used _ Respectively they are UNSECURE Autost WZ 1 and UNSECURE Autost WZ 2 After entering these commands the operator can work freely on the Autost program In addition the KEY program is secured using security type 3 This was done to discourage the casual user from changing the programs Instead there is a program named SECURITY which lists the name of the KEY program The program listing for SECURITY is 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM SECURITY CODE 40 REM noo 50 REM 60 REM blank KEY 70 REM 80 REM 90 END Thus if the operator does not have ready access to this document while using the system the information regarding protection codes is still obtainable during system use To navigate through the process of unsecuring any files 1 get a catalog of the tape or disk CAT 2 load the program SECURITY LOAD SECURITY 3 list the program LIST 4 get the name of the blank file blank file KEY 5 load the program KEY LOAD KEY 6 list the program to the printer PLIST 7 unsecure the desired program 214 the operator can open any program for editing without leaving the computer In this manner VOLUME II APPENDIX C USER S MANUAL 216 CHAPTER 1 2
166. e settings from the digitizer 1612D will decompose the instrument settings coming from the digitizer and display those settings on the computer screen After displaying all of the instrument settings the program will ask the operator whether or not the settings are correct If they are the program sets a software flag to that effect 8 2 4 Zero Compensation 1612D grounds the input of the plug in to be used Then the program arms and triggers the sweep If there is any dc drift in the plug in the program will receive a non zero sweep This is typically the case although the error is rarely large 7612D calculates the average value of the first ten 10 data points The program stores this value as the zero 0 correction factor for that plug in The program then repeats the process if two 2 Curves are to be taken 8 2 5 Settings Checkout If the software flag for correct settings is not set 7612D returns to the instrument setup process section 8 2 3 Otherwise the program checks for multiple records As mentioned earlier the program is limited to a single record with a maximum length of 1024 data points If either the records are multiple or the record length is greater than 1024 points 7612D notifies the operator of the error and returns 243 to the instrument setup process section 8 2 3 Otherwise the program proceeds with true unit computation 8 2 6 True Unit Computation 12412 asks whether or not a device oth
167. e to voltage or pressure to voltage Neither was the program designed to accept algebraic relationships NIC85 was written to accept numeric pairs and calculate a conversion 251 coefficient for multiplicative conversion processes However unlike 76122 the operator needs to enter multiplying probes such as a 10x probe 2 7 Data Storage If the operator is storing two 2 curves once the voltage conversion processes are entered NIC85 will see if the two curves to be stored together are the same type e g both curves are current If the curves are the same the program returns to the data storage setup process where the operator is asked to enter curve pairs for storage section 9 5 Otherwise the program notifies the operator the data is being stored 2 1 1 File Creation Errors NIC85 will attempt to create a file for storage At this point two 2 common errors arise One 1 is a duplicate file error This arises when the program attempts to create a file that already exists on the mass storage device The program will notify the user of the error NIC85 then asks whether or not the operator wishes to purge the existing file If so NIC85 will purge the existing file and create the file for storage Otherwise the program will ask for a new file name With a new file name the program will try to create a file again The second common error arises from a problem with the mass storage device Typically the problem arises from te
168. e y values Integrate product curve with respect to time to new file 298 new file name ue Purge old file same as old No Rename new file to new entry Do you want to process more Curves No Load and run Autost 299 PLOT The PLOT program generates all plots of curves with respect to time e g voltage vs time The data is stored in two 2 possible formats unprocessed and processed The unprocessed data is read into the computer and plotted using the values stored in the control registers The control registers contain information regarding the number of points in the curve the number of x divisions value per x division time value per y division e g voltage curve type i e voltage or current and time and date of measurement The processed data is read into the computer and plotted using values calculated by the computer The program scans the given curve values finds the minimum and maximum values and plots the curve to fill 80 of the plotting area The PLOT program allows the operator to plot curves singularly or in groups and to scale the size of the plot Also the program allows the plots to be made on either a grid or an open graph Finally the PLOT program allows the operator to generate a set of second breakdown statistics if processed data is being used The program will print values for voltage current power energy and time at second break
169. ecause handshake CTL line is not in proper state 391 Possible Corrective Action ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions Error Number 117 118 119 Condit An interface dependent error HP IB The statement used requires the interface to be non controller Serial This error number not currently used BCD Interface command has been directed to a non existent field GPIO This error number not currently used An interface dependent error HP IB This error number not currently used Serial This error number not currently used BCD Cannot start operation because CTL line is not in proper state GPIO This error number not currently used An interface dependent error HP IB This error number not currently used Serial This error number not currently used BCD Data format does not match the mode of the interface GPIO This error number not currently used 392 Possible o acti ERRSC can be
170. econd system within the laboratory The second system includes an HP2105MX Minicomputer a Tektronix 4010 I Graphics Terminal and a Versatek Matrix 1110A Printer Plotter By interfacing the two 2 systems data acquired by the HP85 based system can be processed off line using the HP2105 Thereby reducing the work load on the HP85 and accomplishing many of the calculations more quickly The increased speed is a product 82 of the power of the minicomputer and the fact that it could be used as a dedicated computational device In the area of enhanced graphics at present the graphics are restricted to the small screen on the HP85 and the plotter The former gives low resolution but quick access the latter gives high resolution but is slow By using the graphics terminal the operator has the opportunity to have both high resolution and speedy access to data representations In addition the printer plotter gives a middle ground between the high speed low resolution of the thermal printer and the low speed high resolution of the plotter In the area of advanced analysis tools two 2 options exist Initially interfacing the second system allows the operator the use of the minicomputer as a dedicated computational machine A second option is to simply develop more analysis tools for the HP85 In either case development of more advanced analysis software is necessary The advantage of the minicomputer option however is that off line computa
171. ed FOR nesting too deep more than 255 active FOR NEXT loops GOSUB nesting too deep more than 255 nested subroutines Memory overflow Attempting to RUN a program that requires more than given memory Attempting to edit too large a program delete a nonexisting line to deallocate program then edit Attempting to load a program larger than available memory Attempting to open a file with no available buffer space Attempting any operation that requires more memory than available Attempting to load or run a large program after a ROM has been installed ROMs use up a certain amount of memory Refer to the appropriate ROM manual Not used 383 Error Number Error Condition 21 ROM missing attempting to RUN program that requires ROM An attempt to edit program with missing ROM will usually SCRATCH memory 22 Attempt to edit list store or overwrite a SECUREd program 23 Self test error system need repair 24 Too many more than 14 ROMs 25 Two binary programs attempting to load a second binary program into memory only one binary program allowed in memory at any time 26 29 Not used Program Errors 30 thru 57 30 OPTION BASE error Duplicate OPTION BASE declaration OPTION BASE after array declaration OPTION BASE parameter not 0 or 1 31 CHAIN error CHAIN to a program other than a BASIC main program e g CHAINing to a binary program 32 COMmon variable mismatch 33 DATA type mismatch READ variable and DATA t
172. elds were satisfied or a field terminator was encountered before the specified character count was reached 395 Possible Corrective Action If the error is from an output operation check the magnitude of the number and the format used If the error is from an input operation there are many possible causes Here are some things to look for more than 255 leading non numeric character unexpected spaces in a character stream when a character count format is used punctuation that include potentially numeric used in an order that is numerically meaningless Check your incoming character stream ENTER list and image specifiers Error Number amp Code 129 VAR TYPE 130 NO TERM conditi The type string or numeric of a variable in an ENTER list does not match with the image specified for that variable A required terminator was not received from an interface or buffer during an ENTER statement Remember that there is a default requirement for a linefeed statement terminator 396 Check your ENTER list and image specifiers Check your incoming character stream ENTER list and image specifiers 397 Mass Storage ROM Error Codes Error Numbe r Code Error Condition 60 WRITE PROTECT 61 gt 42 FILES 62 CARTRIDGE OUT 63 DUP NAME 64 EMPTY FILE 65 END OF TAPE 66 FILE CLOSED 67 FILE NAME 68 FILE TYPE 69 RANDOM OVF 70 The mass storage medium
173. em with the mass storage device Typically the problem arises from telling TABLET to create a file on a mass storage device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage and return to the beginning of the data storage process On rare occasions other errors may arise If this occurs TABLET will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 11 5 2 Normal Operations Once TABLET has created a file the program stores the control register s and begins sequentially storing all data The program stores the x data first then the y data If the operator has chosen to store the curves separately TABLET will return to the beginning of the data storage cycle section 11 5 to store the second curve Otherwise the program will notify the operator the data is stored After TABLET has finished the storage cycle the program will ask if the operator wishes to digitize more data If the operator does wish to digitize more data the program will return to the beginning of the main program section 11 3 and wait for the operator to finish with the data preparation section 11 2 If the operator does not wish to digitize more data TABLET will return to Autost 11 6 Print Devi Dat TABLET was developed as support for testing of semiconductor devices Documentation of infor
174. ements will be taken Using this to bound the equation the worst case error term occurs when the sample period ts is chosen as zero 0 For tg 0 the error term is one 1 part in 50000 of ttot However for considerations of energy a useful quantity is the minimum m which produces a negligible value for k Presuming that k is negligible for any 2170 gt 10k k is insignificant any time more than 40 samples are acquired using the HP System Voltmeter Therefore the user needs to take a minimum of 40 samples when using the HP System Voltmeter This yields an error term for time of one 1 part in 20000 Of ttot For the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer the minimum sample sets are 2048 data and 512 data respectively The error terms for time are 1 one 1 part in 20 5 million of ttot using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and 2 one 1 part in 14 6 million of ttot using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer The error terms for power are 1 one 1 part in 2048 of Pmax using the HP System Voltmeter 2 one 1 part in 2048 of Pmax using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope 3 one 1 part in 64 of Pmax using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer and 4 one 1 part in 1600 of Pmax 76 for the HP Graphics Tablet Comparing the relative magnitudes of the error terms k is insignificant for the HP System Voltmeter the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope and the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer while k and 21
175. en after the final assembly of the system These tests were performed to establish effective benchmarks of the effectiveness and accuracy of the data acquisition and conditioning system Chapter 6 provides a final summary analysis of the system In the final chapter the author provides a comparison between the system capabilities and the objectives set forth in this chapter In addition the author develops a framework for developing the next generation of data acquisition system for this laboratory In so doing the author defines the areas where the system can be improved to provide a more substantial aid to the graduate students carrying out work within the laboratory Areas of expansion ranging from enhanced graphics to artificial intelligence are discussed In addition the reader is provided with several appendices to further document the work that was done Appendix A of the thesis is a fully commented listing for each of the software programs within the system Prior to each of these program listings is an abstract describing the function of the specific software program Appendix B is a description of the program protection system In this appendix to the thesis the reader is provided with a description of the program protection codes This is done to provide the reader with the information necessary to edit any of the software programs on the system Undoubtedly occasions will arise where the needs of the laboratory will exceed the limi
176. en for the intermediate measurements was the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope referred to as the Nicolet The Nicolet was designed as a digital storage oscilloscope In the version purchased by the Solid State Electronics Laboratory the Nicolet has an on board floppy disk for permanent storage The Nicolet can store up to eight 8 512 sample traces in volatile memory These sample times are selectable down to 500 nanoseconds In addition the Nicolet allows traces to be stored which are a sum or a difference of the two 2 inputs Although the Nicolet can save eight 8 traces this work only used two 2 of the traces The software controlling the transfer of data from the Nicolet to the computer was purchased from Software Consulting Group of Santa Clara California This software then was modified extensively to facilitate its use by the laboratory In addition to its use as a controlled data acquisition unit the Nicolet can be used as a free running oscilloscope The machine was designed to function as a normal oscilloscope with its enhanced storage capabilities Thus the Nicolet can be used freely off line from the system for any number of experiments 2 2 3 Fast M t Capabiliti The unit chosen for the fast measurements was the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer referred to as the 7612D The 7612D was designed as a single shot storage device The unit purchased for the laboratory had two 2 programmable dual channel plug i
177. ener 7612D Arm traces amp trigger Wait 90 ms Repeat Give 7612D local cntl Take cntl and cycle Return to Autost 144 350 NEXT I 360 CHAIN Autost D700 370 END Load Autost prog 145 TABLET The TABLET program controls the HP9111A Graphics Tablet The tablet is used to digitize up to two 2 1024 point curves by hand The operator enters the corners of the graph the number of x divisions value per x division time the number of y divisions value per y divisions e g voltage and the location of the zero line The program uses these values to correct the data for rotational and translational digitizing errors and scales the data to represent the curves digitized i e converts xy coordinates to voltage vs time data This converted data is stored The TABLET program also allows the operator to generate a hardcopy of device data The program will list manufacturer device type mask type device number temperature second breakdown type forward base current nominal reverse base current reverse base current at second breakdown and comments These device data are not stored however 10 REM 30 REM TABLET MAIN 40 REM PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 7 6 85 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 REM Chuck Graves wizard 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 REM REM COM X 10 INTEGER
178. er comments Print comments digitization complete Notify user softkey is unused Notify user to select another softkey Increment nuisance counter digitization Yes counter lt 4 complete Yes Wait 4500 1 No Notify user to buzz off 374 375 The HP85 Desktop Computer has limited memory space Therefore during the data acquisition processes using the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope auxiliary data acquired from the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM is stored in a compact format The VMAUX program was written to convert this compact data format into a standard format The VMAUX program reads the compact data file into the computer generates the control registers necessary for later processing and stores the data in standard format This program is called automatically by NIC85 and 7612D before they pass control back to Autost 376 O Close aux buffer Read auxiliary data Calculate curves Close reg buffer Initialize registers Calculate data Load aux start time Set default values Enter aux file name Load regular date Wait 4500 Open reg buffer Open aux buffer Is name too Notify user name is too long long Notify user program reading No Is there an Enter mass storage Yes error No error 130
179. er than a voltage probe is used If so the program asks for the plug in s with some conversion process The program asks for the particular conversion process on a given plug in 7612D will accept only a voltage to voltage or current to voltage conversion process The program was not written for conversion processes such as temperature to voltage or pressure to voltage Neither was the program designed to accept algebraic relationships 7612D was written to accept numeric pairs and calculate a conversion coefficient for multiplicative conversion processes Entry of multiplying voltage probes however is not necessary The digitizer has the capability to tell whether a multiplying voltage probe is being used on a plug in Therefore 2612D will include that constant in the calculation without operator entry The program then verifies whether or not the internal clock is being used If not the program asks for the external clock frequency and calculates the sampling period 8 3 Data A isiti After finishing the instrument setup process 1612D will ask the operator to enter the time base to be armed If the entry is not valid the program will ask the operator to make a valid entry Otherwise the program will arm the time base and tell the operator to take a measurement After taking a measurement the operator needs to press CONTINUE However 1612D only arms the digitizer for one 1 measurement If the measurement is not desireable the ope
180. essed voltage curve 2 900 IF T 1 AND K 2 THEN I 1 K 3 Change values for unprocessed voltage curve 1 910 GOTO 1060 Proceed with plotting 164 920 I 1 K 3 K current L 2 I position of time array in file for current curve t K position of current array in file K type of curve L curve position index Default values are for processed data files current is curve 1 930 IF CHRS P 2 5 V AND CHR P 1 5 A THEN DISP Only voltage WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If curve 1 is voltage and curve 2 is not current notify user and return to main program 940 IF CHR P 1 5 V AND CHRS P 2 5 A THEN DISP Only voltage WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If curve 1 is voltage and curve 2 is not current notify user and return to main program 950 IF CHRS P 1 5 A THEN K 2 Current is curve 2 960 IF T 1 AND K 3 THEN I 2 K 4 Change values for unprocessed current curve 2 970 IF T 1 AND K 2 THEN I 1 K 3 Change values for unprocessed current curve 1 980 GOTO 1060 Proceed with plotting 990 IF T 1 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP No power curve WAIT 4500 GOTO 370 If not processed data file notify user amp return to main prog 1000 I 1 K 4 K power L 3 I position of time array in file for power curve K position of power array in file K type of curve L curve position index 1010 GOTO 1060 Proceed with plotting 1020 IF T 1 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP No energy curve WAIT 45
181. ests the operator to choose a time frame to sample over Enter the total time over which to take samples Max 192 s Separate number from unit with a comma The operator chooses to sample over the maximum sample period and enters 192 S Given this information the software calculates the number of samples to be taken Then the software notifies the operator that the operation has begun The measurement is taken in two 2 pieces First the software takes a measurement Then the computer awaits the designated sample time before taking another measurement Thus the following messages are repeated until the operation is completed Taking data and Waiting When the software has completed the data acquisition it sets off a two tone alarm which sounds until the operator responds to the following prompt The data is stored Press K1 to continue program When the operator presses the Kl key the alarm halts and the program proceeds to the data storage phase First the program asks Where do you want to store these curves DISK00 DISK01 TAPE This is responded to with DISK00 The disk is preferred since it is much quicker than the tape drive on the HP85 The computer then begins the storage process This is done 34 by notifying the operator that There are 2 curves and then requesting the operator to Enter the name for curve 1 This is entered as DASTST The software then proceeds with the actual storage cycle The program fi
182. et Label plot divisions Draw open graph Is this the last read Yes Read remaining x points S Read 2048 x points 05 7 S Read 2048 y points Is this the last read Yes Reset character size e Read remaining y points Label x axis Label y axis Enter y coordinate for date and time Enter year Build date time string Reset character size Label data and time Label graph Enter y coordinate for graph label Enter label for graph 312 Do you ant 2nd breakdown i o Wait 4500 Notify user file statistics Has file been is not processed processed Yes Notify user to reload plotter Set plotter for Scan for peak voltage printing data Print instantaneous value of current at 2nd breakdown Is voltage value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Assign proper Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Round to 3 significant digits Assign proper string prefix Print instantaneous value of voltage at 2nd breakdown string prefix Round to 3 significant digits Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Is current value lt 1 Read value of c
183. etitive unequal bit pattern with a length greater than two 2 bits This type of pattern was not observed Therefore the HP System Voltmeter is presumed to have no appreciable gain error Next the monotonicity of the data was examined Again there was no indication of error Since the data was monotonic it can be inferred that linearity is within the constraints of 11 2 least significant bit and that there were no stuck bits during the measurement Finally the symmetry of the data was examined If a hysteresis error existed the symmetry of the data would be perturbed Again there was no indication of an error Therefore the errors associated with the A D conversion of the HP System Voltmeter are within theoretical limits This indicates that the HP System Voltmeter was operating at the accuracy claimed by the manufacturer The 3 1 2 digit accuracy of the HP System Voltmeter corresponds to a 12 bit accuracy 5 2 5 Nicolet Digital Oscill M Next a triangular waveform was measured using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope This measurement was patterned after the one performed using the HP System Voltmeter In this case the waveform was a 4 volt 67 triangular wave with a frequency of approximately 800 Hz This waveform was digitized approximately once every 25 us This data was then examined for any indications of the errors set forth in section 5 2 2 First the data was examined for evidence of gain error This type of error can b
184. f interconnecting the subsystems This program Autost allows the operator to choose from all of the system capabilities When the operator powers up the system Autost is automatically loaded and run From this program the operator chooses the subsystem to be used When the program begins the following appears on the screen Enter the data in a MMDD format For example March 5 is entered 0305 After the operator enters the correct date 0803 the computer will display Enter the time in an HHMMSS format For example 3 a m is entered 030000 The operator enters an accurate time of day 022828 29 30 and the software sets the time and date of the computer The computer has then been initialized for operations Initializing the computer time and date is important because these values are stored with the data that is taken This serves to document exactly when the measurements were taken Now the operator is allowed to choose the operation to be implemented The computer displays the message Press key for desired function K1 Choose among data takers K2 Process data K3 Plot curves K4 Plot I V curve only K5 Use graphics capabilities The operator chooses from among these options Based upon the option chosen by the operator the computer proceeds to poll the equipment on the network to make sure the subsystem elements are available If the operator chooses to take data the computer produces the following list of
185. fore the program asks for that zero reference level For curve 1 on a scale of 0 to 8 what is the y coordinate for the origin 0 lower left corner 4 left center and 8 upper left corner After entering the relative position of the zero reference for curve 1 4 the software notifies the operator to begin entering the curve Digitize curve 1 The program then displays the options which can be selected by pressing the available keys K1 End of curve 49 K2 Store all data K3 Process new set K4 Finished K5 Print device data These are in addition to the softkey assignments printed earlier This is done so that the operator can select functions from either the graphics tablet or the computer keyboard After the operator has entered the curves the computer displays Digitization process is complete Please press key or digitize softkey to continue From this point the operator first chooses to store the data First the software asks What name do you want for the storage file To this the operator responds TABTST Next the software asks for the desired storage location Where do you want the curves stored DISK00 DISK01 TAPE Again the operator chooses the disk because of its storage speed DISK00 The program then proceeds to store the data and notifies the operator Storing data in TABTST Data is stored When the program finishes storing the data the operator is asked whether or not another set
186. fset associated with the plug in s Thus there remain five 5 possible errors which can impact the accuracy of the measurement 1 gain error 2 hysteresis error 3 non linearity 4 differential non linearity and 5 stuck bits In order to evaluate the possible effect of these errors a slow triangular waveform was measured using each of the two 2 components From the resulting data file each of the errors was examined If there is a gain error then a constant slope waveform such as a triangular or saw tooth wave will develop a recurring pattern in the individual changes from point to point For example instead of having a pattern of 2 2 2 2 2 2 there will be a pattern of 2 4 3 2 4 3 The latter pattern indicates the bits are not equally weighted If there is a hysteresis error then a constant slope symmetrical waveform will not transition from value to value in an equivalent manner on opposite sides of the waveform This is consistent with the description for hysteresis error given in section 5 2 1 If there is a problem with non linearity the montonicity of the signal will be destroyed As noted in section 5 2 1 a monotonic ADC will never give decreasing values for an increasing voltage input By examining the values measured for a triangular or saw tooth wave one can find if the curve is truly monotonic If so the linearity of the component is within the bounds of 1 1 2 least significant bit LSB 65 Finally
187. function as a transfer network The operator sets the time base channels trigger functions etc at 19 the front panel of the Nicolet Once the settings are completed the operator takes a measurement apne HP3437A Data Acquisition So System Voltmeter Control Unit HP Interface Bus HPIB Nicolet 2090 III HP85 HP 9895A Digital Desktop Computer Flexible Disk Drive Oscilloscope Figure 3 2 Intermediate Measurement Subsystem Once the operator has obtained a trace worthy of storage the operator notifies the computer to transfer the data The Nicolet has a total memory capacity of 4096 points This capacity is divided equally between the traces If one 1 trace is taken all 4096 points are used by that trace if four 4 traces are taken 1024 points are used by each curve The Nicolet can be set to take 1 2 4 or 8 traces The software was designed to enter a representative group of points from the trace This was done using a sequential skip If there are 1024 points in a curve all points are entered and zero 0 points are skipped if there are 4096 points in a curve 1 4 of the points are entered and 3 of every 4 points are skipped every fourth point is entered The data acquired by the computer is a voltage Thus when the data acquisition is completed the computer asks for any conversion factors in the process This is to allow the operator to conditio
188. g a plot on a processed data file the software asks Do you want a copy of the second breakdown statistics If the operator does not wish to obtain a copy of the second breakdown characteristics then the reply is entered N and the program returns to the available options indicated earlier Otherwise the operator enters the response Y and the software displays Load plotter and press CONTINUE After the operator loads the plotter and presses CONTINUE the software proceeds to calculate the second breakdown statistics This is done by examining the voltage curve to find the time at which second breakdown began The values of each of the quantities are printed which correspond to that time with the following statements The value for instantaneous voltage at 2nd breakdown is 765 V The value for instantaneous current at 2nd breakdown is 3 38 A 54 The value for instantaneous power at 2nd breakdown is 2580 W The value for instantaneous energy at 2nd breakdown is 166 uJ 2nd breakdown occurs at 722 us The program then finds the time which corresponds to the voltage which most closely approximates 10 of the second breakdown voltage This time is defined to be t Then the values which corresponded to t are printed for each of the quantities To is the time at 10 of the 2nd breakdown The value for voltage at To The value for current at To The value for voltage instantaneous is 76 5V instantaneous is 5
189. han 1 3320 GOSUB 3380 No division routine 3330 GOTO 3350 3340 GOSUB 3500 Yes multiply routine 3350 GOSUB 3760 Rounding routine B 3360 GOSUB 3860 Units routine 3370 RETURN 3380 REM DIVISION SUBROUTINE 3390 E 0 3400 FOR F 1 TO 5 Divide by 103 3410 D D 1000 to calculate engr 3420 IF D lt 1 THEN 3450 units 3430 E E 1 Increment engr ind 3440 NEXT F 3450 D D 1000 3460 FOR F 1 TO E Change units to reflect 3470 W k W C1 C1 1000 change in number 3480 NEXT F 3490 RETURN 3500 REM MULTIPLICATION 3510 REM SUBROUTINE 3520 E 0 3530 FOR F 1 TO 5 Multiply by 103 to 3540 D D 1000 calculate engr units 3550 E E 1 Increment engr ind 3560 IF D gt 1 THEN 3580 3570 NEXT F 3580 FOR F 1 TO E Change units to reflect 3590 W m swW C1 C1 1000 change in number 3600 NEXT F 3610 RETURN 3620 REM TESTA SUBROUTINE Round number to desireable value for graphing purposes 3630 IF D gt 1 AND D lt 2 THEN D 2 3640 IF D gt 2 AND D lt 25 THEN D 25 3650 3660 3670 3680 3690 3700 3710 3720 3730 3740 3750 3760 3770 3780 3790 3800 3810 3820 3830 3840 3850 3860 3870 3880 3890 3900 3910 3920 3930 3940 3950 3960 175 IF D gt 25 AND D lt 5 THEN D 5 IF D gt 5 AND D lt 1 THEN D 1 IF D gt 1 AND D lt 2 THEN D 2 IF D gt 2 AND D lt 2 5 THEN D 2 5 IF D gt 2 5 AND D lt 5 THEN D 5 IF D gt 5 AND D lt 10 THEN D 10 IF D gt 10 AND D lt 20 THEN D 20
190. hat time frame together 3 interpolates both curves for each of the time data 4 evaluates the product for the curves 5 evaluates the time integral for the product curve and 6 stores all of these curves in a new file 4 3 1 Read In the process of reading through the curves MATH establishes a common time frame which is shared by the curves For example if curve one 1 has data over the time period from 5 ns to 50 Hs in 5 ns steps and curve two 2 has data over the time period from 10 ns to 100 Hs in 10 ns steps then the data is useful only from 10 ns to 50 Ms Outside that area the data cannot be used because only one 1 value is known and the program needs two 2 values to evaluate a non zero product 4 3 2 Sort Interpolate and Evaluate Next MATH sorts all of the values of time together This is followed by developing a linear interpolation between each y value for both curves The program evaluates both curves for each time value using the linear interpolation In this manner the program has developed two 2 curves of equivalent size which have y values evaluated at the same times Thus MATH can evaluate a product curve corresponding to instantaneous power by simple multiplication 4 3 3 Time Integral After evaluating the product curve MATH evaluates the time integral of the product curve using a trapezoidal approximation Due to the geometry of these curves the trapezoid is the sum of the area of a triangle and
191. he computer The capabilities of the system software will be more closely examined in Chapter 3 2 4 4 Very Fast Measurement Capabiliti Hand Entry As mentioned in section 2 2 this process is not truly a measurement Instead the HP 9111A Graphics Tablet was chosen to carry out the hand entered process Thus the time resolution was no longer restricted to the capabilities of a digital data acquisition unit Analog data acquisition methods could be capitalized upon by allowing hand entry of data Thus the data which could be accessed by the system was essentially unlimited However since the data entered was digitized by hand the problem of human error arose This seemed an acceptable trade off for the data obtainable Besides allowing entry of very fast transient data the operator could enter data taken prior to development of the system and data acquired outside of the laboratory 11 The tablet has two 2 active areas for digitization The first is bounded by a grey line on the board This area is referred to as the active platen When the point of the pen is depressed within this area the tablet outputs the coordinates associated with the pen s location The second area at the top of the tablet is subdivided into a set of sixteen 16 smaller areas Each of these areas are referred to as softkeys When the point of the pen is depressed within these areas the tablet outputs the softkey associated with the pen s location These
192. he voltage conversion process is complete or if there is no voltage conversion process VMAUX sorts the minimum and maximum voltage values out of the data The program uses these values and the final storage time to calculate the x per division and the y per division 269 The program stores the remainder of the control register s the x data and the y data values for this curve If there is another curve VMAUX will accept a new file name and begin the storage routine over again section 12 3 Otherwise the program asks whether or not the operator stored another regular file If so VMAUX asks for a new regular file name The file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a name the program will ask the operator to enter a valid name After receiving a valid file name the program will return to the beginning of the data retrieval process section 12 2 If the operator did not store another regular file with an attendant auxiliary file VMAUX will return to Autost 12 4 Reference A complete outline of YMAUX is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 376 through 379 270 CHAPTER 13 NORMAL FILE FORMAT 13 1 Overview In each of the data acquisition processes data is stored in a consistent format This is done so the processing and plotting packages will work on all storage files The only files that have a different format are the auxiliary files referred to in Chapters
193. her than in milliseconds This revolution has not been utilized solely by the theoreticians As technology has advanced computers have become a mainstay in the laboratory There they have proven of inestimable value Though initially devised to aid in calculation the computer has come to be a very powerful controller As a controller the computer has become a centerpiece in the experimental laboratory Using the technology available at the present time experimentalists can use the computer to control measurements which would have been impossible otherwise At present a growing impetus exists to supplant former measurement techniques and equipment with more sophisticated computer aided techniques and computer controlled hardware This is due to the fact that when properly programmed a computer can remove a great deal of the problems associated with laboratory work Some of the problems associated with experimental laboratory work are 1 experiments which require long observation times 2 short period events which are aperiodic 3 analog to digital conversions to make possible calculations and 4 simple human error Of the problems noted the final problem is the most prevalent Human error arises in many cases where laboratory conditions similar to problem areas 1 2 and 3 exist In these cases the accuracy and attentiveness of a computer are needed Where computers are utilized in the experimental process to replace the human
194. hey do not reflect however the extensive error handling capabilities of the system software Instead the operator is presented with the prompts generated by the computer and realistic operator responses In addition to the tutorials presented in this chapter the operator May refer to Appendix C for a complete user s manual Also there are 60 program listings contained in Appendix A if the reader is interested in the exact manner in which the operations are performed CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM ACCURACY 2 1 Introduction In the previous chapters the development of a data acquisition and conditioning system was discussed from conceptualization to implementation The discussion of the system would not be complete however without a discussion of system accuracy System accuracy will be considered in two 2 distinct areas 1 data acquisition and 2 data conditioning For the data acquisition discussion system accuracy is considered to be the difference between the bit accuracy claimed by the manufacturer and the bit accuracy observed during measurements made with the component To support this line of investigation the various errors associated with analog to digital conversion were identified and their respective effects on the data analyzed For the data conditioning discussion system accuracy is considered to be the errors associated with the data processing This processing includes both binary to decimal code conversions and multipl
195. icative scalar corrections In support of this investigation the separate numerical algorithms were analyzed pauta pr E E E Sun a To ascertain the accuracy of the system components the inherent errors associated with analog to digital A D conversion were defined Each type of A D conversion then was examined to identify the conversion errors which were unique to a given form of A D conversion After identifying the pertinent errors for each type of A D conversion each subsystem was examined to identify the respective conversion type thereby identifying the pertinent A D errors Finally measurements were defined and performed to ascertain the system component accuracy 61 62 5 2 1 Definit f A D C Each of the subsystems has a component which carries out some A D conversion Several different types of errors are associated with any A D conversion A D conversion errors include quantizing error gain error offset zero error hysteresis error non linearity and differential non linearity These errors are inherent in the A D conversions carried out by the HP System Voltmeter and the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope Quantizing error is the uncertainty associated with each digital step All analog values within a given range are represented by the same digital code Therefore there is a limited accuracy in the value of the measurement In most cases the code is equivalent to the midrange value so that the uncertainty is 1 2 the le
196. imum value in curve G minimum value in curve 1480 WS CHRS P I 1 5 Set units 1490 D U x0 2 GOSUB 2060 U D G Cl Set values for magnitude division rounding routine D unrounded horiz magn div X0 horiz magn scaling indicator V returns as rounded horiz magn div Cl returns as scaled min 1500 U1 ws Assign scale horizontal units 185 1510 LOCATE M M H 35 N N H 35 Set active plotting area N amp M are margins H is scale factor 1520 IF C gt V 10 THEN C V Prevent routine from truncating the vertical minimum 1530 IF FP C V lt 1 OR FP G U lt 1 THEN P 3 2 P 3 2 1 Expand plot to include minimum 1540 IF G gt U 10 THEN G U Prevent routine from truncating the horizontal minimum 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 FRAME CSIZE H 50 10 22 4 Set char size A IP G U 9 SGN G 1 Min scale value horiz B IP C V 9 SGN C 1 Min scale value vert SCALE A U A P 3 2 U B V B P 3 2 V Scale active area IF Q GRID THEN 1620 Chose grid AXES U V 0 0 1 1 5 No plot graph GOTO 1630 GRID U V 0 0 1 1 Yes plot grid GOSUB 3280 Plot labeling routine B 1 O 1 Start pen up read posn FOR J 1 TO Q CLEAR BEEP DISP Reading VAL J of VAL Q GOSUB 1790 Read amp draw routine NEXT J LORG 6 Label posn
197. ing characteristics of avalanche transistors There the risetimes were on the order of 1 nanosecond 2 2 1 8 M t Capabiliti The units chosen for the slow measurements were the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and the HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM The DACU has a variety of modules which can be plugged into the unit The modules include both digital and analog capabilities for controlling and monitoring inputs and outputs The module used for this work was an analog module The module has three 3 analog inputs which can be selected individually The selected channel is transferred to the DVM The DVM then measures the voltage on the line and outputs the value to the computer The DVM has an accuracy of 3 1 2 digits with voltage ranges of 10 V 1V and 1 V Thus the DVM can measure quantities down to several millivolts However in order to measure a large voltage e g 150 V some type of attenuation is necessary The DACU is used primarily as a timer to switch to channels in its analog module While the DACU can switch once every 100 milliseconds the analog line has a finite settling time Experimentation showed that approximately 5 second was necessary from the time a channel was output 9 to the DVM to the time when the DVM was triggered This insured that the measurement was reliable Thus there is a finite delay due to the equipment This delay is programmed into the software discussed later The unit chos
198. ing the printout of the device data the software returns to its former operation Thus if the device data is produced during digitization then the software returns to the digitization process If however the operator digitizes a softkey which is not defined 6 through 16 then the program displays This softkey performs no function Please choose another 4 6 Hardcopy Output Subsystem Tutorial When the operator chooses to get a hardcopy output of the curves which have been acquired the program PLOT is loaded and run First the program displays the message Initializing Unless PLOT is the first program to be called after applying power to the system the name of the last file to be processed is passed to the program Therefore the software asks first Where is TABTST stored TAPE DISKO0 DISKO01 To this the operator responds DISK00 The program then displays the available options The program is written so that first the operator chooses the desired plot then the software loads the proper plot if it exists Currently operating on TABTST Plot V Plot I Plot P Plot U Scale New Set Finished Based upon the operation chosen the software loads the proper curve For any of the plot routines the software asks Do you want this plot by itself Y N If the operator wants a plot of the curve by itself then the reply is 52 entered Y and the software sets up the plot so that only one 1 plot is placed on a sheet
199. iven for file name 83 Comma missing or more parameters expected separated by commas 84 Excess characters delete characters at end of good line then press ENDLINE 85 Expression too big for system to interpret 86 Illegal statement after THEN 87 Bad DIM statement 88 Bad statement COM in calculator mode User defined function in calculator mode INPUT in calculator mode 89 Invalid parameter ON KEY less than 1 or greater than 8 Attempt to TRACE a calculator mode variable PRINTER IS or CRT IS with invalid parameter CREATE with invalid parameters ASSIGN PRINT or READ with buffer number other than 1 through 10 Random READ to record 0 SETTIME with illegal time parameter ON TIMER OFF TIMER with number other than Lap OLS SCALE with invalid parameters AUTO or REN with invalid parameters LIST with invalid parameters DELETE with invalid parameters Error Number 90 91 92 388 Possible Error Condition Corrective Action VALS with non numeric parameter Any statement command or function for which parameters are given but they are invalid Line number too large greater than 9999 Missing parameter e g DELETE with missing or invalid parameters Syntax error Cursor returns to character where error was found Error Number 101 110 I O CARD 111 I O OPER 1 0 ROM Error Codes Error Condition This is only a warning It is issued when a program is paused with an I O TRANSF
200. izontal title Input vertical title No more than 25 re enter vertical title A of 2048 byte blks B fractional part A Q1 of reads curve 1 Allow for integer A A of 2048 byte blks B fractional part A Q2 of reads curve 2 Allow for integer A Choose grid or graph If chose single plot option set x origin offset 166 1330 M 10 FP L 1 2 136 A Calculate x origin 1340 IF S Y THEN B 4 5 If chose single plot option set y origin offset 1350 Ne15 1 IP L 1 4 50 B Calculate y origin 1360 CLEAR BEEP DISP Load plotter and press CONTINUE PAUSE 1370 S1 6 P1 5 K 1 P I 4 Calculate position of first value to be read in processed file 1380 IF T 1 THEN S1 6 P1 5 K 2 P 1 4 P 2 4 Calculate position of first value to be read in unprocessed file 1390 S2 5 P1 5 K P I 4 Calculate position of last value to be read in processed file 1400 IF T 1 THEN S2 5 P1 5 K 2 P 2 4 2 P 1 4 Calculate position of last value to be read in unprocessed file 1410 READ 1 S1 B Read first value 1420 A B C B Set default max min 1430 CLEAR BEEP DISP Scanning 1440 FOR J S1 1 TO S2 1450 READ 1 J B 1460 IF B gt A THEN A B Set if new max 1470 IF B lt C THEN C B Set if new min 1480 NEXT J 1490 IF T 1 THEN 1580 Branch if unprocessed 1500 V 5 4 A C P 3 2 C1 C Calculate vertical magn div P 3 2 of vertical divisions A ma
201. ke more data IF K Y THEN GOSUB 3450 GOTO 880 Yes repetitive meas CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP DISP DISP Re initializing GOTO 180 or reset non repetitive CLEAR BEEP No return to Autost IF V Y THEN CHAIN VMAUX D700 Process aux meas first DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 1 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 Load Autost END REM REM REM SETTINGS SUBROUTINE REM 1 INPUT TIME REM BASE SETTINGS REM 2 INPUT PLUG IN REM SETTINGS REM REM SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Listener 7612D OUTPUT 7 REM ON Set Remote SRQ LOCAL 7 Give 7612D local cntl SEND 7 CMD SPE UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 Config 7612D for poll Q SPOLL 7 Serial poll 7612D IF NOT BIT Q 7 THEN 1680 SRQ asserted GOTO 1640 No repeat poll REMOTE 7 Yes take control SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 0 Listener 7612D OUTPUT 7 REM OFF SET TMBS A NBPT Ask settings A brkpts SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 0 Talker 7612D 126 1720 ENTER 7 USING K S A1 Enter settings A bkpts 1730 SEND 7 3 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 1 Listener left plugin 1740 OUTPUT 7 INP BW CPL RN VAR V D POL POS PRB Ask for input bandwidth coupling term imp variable gain volt div polarity position probe multiplier for left plugin 1750 SEND 7 UNT MLA TALK 2 SCG 1 Talker left plugin 1760 ENTER 7 USING K A2 Enter left plugin set 1770 SEND 7 UNL MT
202. ks made by the operator on the media using either pencils or eraseable pens If the data must be marked use a pen with permanent ink 11 3 Main Program Operation After initializing all the registers TABLET prints out a copy of the functions assigned to the softkeys on the graphics tablet These softkeys allow the operator to choose from several functions without leaving the graphics tablet Digitizing a softkey is functionally equivalent to pressing one 1 of the keys K1 through K10 discussed in the preceding chapters 41 3 1 Main Program Setup TABLET will ask for the number of curves to be digitized The program can store two 2 curves with a maximum of 512 points each If the operator inputs a number other than one 1 or two 2 the program will request a valid input i e ask the operator to enter one 1 or two 2 Once TABLET has received a valid entry the program will initialize the graphics tablet and ask the operator to digitize the corners of the graph grid TABLET uses the next four 4 points to calculate the position of the graph relative to the graphics tablet and the rotational orientation 260 of the graph relative to the graphics tablet During this operation the program will not allow the operator to use the softkeys If a softkey is digitized the program simply ignores the choice In addition TABLET must receive the points in the order upper left upper right lower left lower right In so doing the p
203. le and stores the auxiliary data in it This storage operation however does not use the data format used by the rest of the program A different format is used for auxiliary files because of the restricted program space in the computer This made necessary the quicker data storage process To make these auxiliary files readable for normal processing a further program VMAUX is used to change to a standard format This program will be referred to later in this chapter 8 5 Program Wrapup If the software flag to separate curves is set 7612D returns to the beginning of the data storage process section 8 4 and asks for a second file name Otherwise the program will notify the operator that the data is stored At this point the program will ask whether or not the operator wishes to take more data If so 1612D will check for the software flag which indicates a repetitive set of measurements If that flag is set the program will return to the beginning of the data acquisition process section 8 3 If that flag is not set the program will return to the main program setup section 8 2 If the operator does not wish to take more data 7612D will load and run one 1 of two 2 programs If auxiliary data was taken using the system multiplexer and system voltmeter the program will load and run YMAUX YMAUX is a supplementary program discussed in Chapter 12 This program takes care of separating reformatting and restoring the auxiliary d
204. le space made necessary the development of an auxiliary processing program YMAUX This program takes care of the processing and storage of the auxiliary voltage measurements YMAUX loads automatically and runs if the slow measurement options are exercised This data acquisition process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 2 2 a sample experiment is performed with the human machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program NIC 85 including computer prompts and operator responses For further details regarding this program refer to 1 Appendix A Program Listings NIC 85 and 2 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 8 Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope Control Package 21 3 2 3 Fast Measurement Subsystem The fast measurement subsystem was developed using the HP85 Desktop Computer the HP9895A Flexible Disk the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer 7612D These units are tied together using the software package named 7612D In addition the fast measurement subsystem was developed with an option to use the slow measurement subsystem described in section 3 2 1 Figure 3 3 shows the block diagram of the fast measurement subsystem aan HP3437A Data Acquisition wn we System Voltmeter Control Unit HP Interface Bus HPIB Tektronix 7612D HP85 HP 9895A Programmable Desktop Computer Flexible Disk Drive Digiti
205. lized data Binary program missing attempting to RUN program requires binary program An attempt to edit will usually SCRATCH memory RETURN without GOSUB reference Illegal IMAGE format string unrecognized character in IMAGE Illegal PRINT USING Data overflows IMAGE declaration Error 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 385 conditi Numeric data with string IMAGE String data with numeric IMAGE PRINT USING image format string is not correct Illegal TAB argument With DEFAULT ON an illegal TAB argument gives a warning message and defaults to TAB 1 Array subscript out of range String variable overflow string too big for variable Missing line reference to a nonexistent statement number Not used Tape Errors 60 thru 75 Tape cartridge is write protected RECORD slide tab is in left most position Attempting to create record more than 42 files on tape Cartridge out when attempting tape operations Duplicate file name for RENAME or CREATE Empty file attempting to access file that was never recorded e g tape was ejected before program was stored but after name was written in directory Refer to PURGE End of tape Tape is run off check cartridge Tape is full Not enough space to CREATE data file File closed Attempting READ PRINT to file that has not been opened with ASSIGN Attempting to close a closed file warning only Tape has been ejected and reinserted 386
206. lling NIC85 to create a file on a mass storage device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage and return to the beginning of the data storage process section 9 5 On rare occasions other errors may arise If this occurs NIC85 will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 252 9 7 2 Normal Operations Once NIC85 has created a file the program stores the control registers and begins sequentially storing all data If the operator chooses to use the system multiplexer and system voltmeter the program will take data on the various channels once every 256 storage operations This is done because the time necessary to take a measurement with the Nicolet is typically short However the time required to store data is relatively long Therefore the auxiliary data taken by the system multiplexer and system voltmeter are acquired during the data storage phase In addition acquiring data from the system multiplexer and system voltmeter takes about 5 s per data to allow the voltage to settle Keep in mind the system multiplexer and system voltmeter are used for slowly changing quantities such as temperature When NIC85 finishes the normal data storage process the program asks whether or not the operator wishes to store another pair of curves If so the program
207. lloscope use a successive approximation method for A D conversion the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer 7612D sweeps an electron beam across a semiconductor target In this manner the 7612D directly converts the position of the beam on the target into a digital code This digital value is then clocked into memory As such the errors mentioned earlier do not pose a problem to the 7612D Only the problem of stuck bits is significant A D Conversion As noted earlier the HP System Voltmeter and the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope are susceptible to several types of error Of the errors mentioned in section 5 2 1 however two 2 error types are not 64 significant 1 quantizing error and 2 offset zero error The quantizing error is not significant because it is intrinsic to all A D conversions This uncertainty is equal to one 1 part in 2 over the full scale reading value For example an 8 bit ADC with a full scale reading of 10 volts will have a quantizing error of 39 06 mV This corresponds to 1 256th of the 10 V full scale reading The offset error is also ignored in the following discussion because the offset error is calibrated out of the measurement by taking a baseline reading prior to the first measurement This data is then used to evaluate an offset value which is removed from the actual data This conditioning removes the offset error numerically to allow for both the offset error in the ADC and the thermal drift and DC of
208. lotting scale and layout which allow this At the beginning of each plotting process the operator can request a single plot to be made This is done to allow plotting of one 1 curve per page In addition the operator has the option of changing the scale of the plot to increase or reduce the final size of the plot The default scaling value is one 1 Thus to reduce a standard plot to 1 4 the original size go to the scaling section and input 25 Besides the plotting capabilities PLOT also allows the operator to generate a printout of the second breakdown characteristics of the device under test The option to get these statistics is located at the end of the plotting process 2 2 Main Program If PLOT is the first program called after the system is powered up the program will ask for the name of the file to be processed Otherwise the program presumes the last file to be worked on is to be used PLOT prompts for the location of the file i e the mass storage unit The program will load the curves from that device if possible The program was developed to trap mass storage errors However PLOT will not test to see if a file is on the mass storage device If the file is not on the mass storage device the operator will be notified and the program will stop In this case change the medium e g floppy disk or tape and rerun the program If PLOT generates a mass storage error enter a different mass storage device or make sure the
209. ls without whose contributions this work would not have been possible Space does not permit me to note all of these individuals and their efforts but several deserve special attention Chief among those are members of my committee who have acted as supporters and advisors throughout my graduate career Dr W M Portnoy graduate advisor and committee chairman whose direction and support provided me the opportunity to undertake and complete my graduate studies Dr D L Gustafson primary thesis advisor whose efforts brought this text from dissociated documentation to completed thesis Dr W T Ford minor advisor whose instruction bridged the often disparate paths between mathematical theory and practice and Dr R H Seacat Jr whose support guidance and counsel throughout my educational career both graduate and undergraduate have molded my perspectives on science engineering and education and our responsibility as individuals to that society which educated us To Mark S Bavousett I owe my eternal thanks for his energy and diligence in serving initially as proofreader and eventually as emissary to the university following my departure from the Lubbock area Without his aid and support all of my labors would have been for naught Lastly I owe the greatest debt of gratitude to a couple whose patience encouragement and financial support over the years have made all things possible Coolidge and Nola Graves my parents iii
210. ly by offering examples to provide as tutorials These tutorials will include computer prompts and correct operator responses Table 3 1 Comparison of Component and Subsystem Capabilities Component Name HP 3537A Nicolet 2090 Tek 7612D HP 9111A Number of Records al B 1 2 8 2 2 2 1 2 Record Length Al B 1 1 256 4096 3 1024 2048 1024 1 512 Minimum Sample Time Al B 1 1E 1 2E 0 5E 7 SE 7 SE 9 SE 9 1E 4 4 1 4 4 la represents component capabilities B subsystem capabilities 2 Software allows 4 curves to be acquired but storage is in pairs 3 Total storage of 4096 points is equally divided among traces 4 Measurements are in meters rather than seconds See section 5 3 1 CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM TUTORIAL 4 1 Introduction In the previous chapters the functional structure of the data acquisition system was analyzed In Chapter 2 the system was examined at the component level by matching individual pieces of equipment to the laboratory needs In Chapter 3 the system was examined at the subsystem level and the interactive capabilities were defined To supplement the subsystem level discussion this chapter was written to provide a tutorial on the subsystem activities For ease of interpretation except where specifically noted the computer requests and the operatorinput use these indicated fonts First however the point should be made that there is a single program which takes care o
211. lysis of the completed system Three 3 realized system goals are 1 relative ease of use 2 use of a variety of data acquisition hardware and 3 timely data reduction The design used an HP 85 computer as the controller for digitizing hardware which included an HP 9111A Graphics Tablet a Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer a Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope and an Hewlett Packard 3437A System Voltmeter These components allow the system to digitize data over the range from 10 picoseconds per sample to 27 775 minutes per sample vi 3 1 5 1 LIST OF TABLES Comparison of Component and Subsystem Capabilities Summary of Processing AccuracieS ooooo WO UU U U Y UU U 3 HD 0 W N F LIST OF FIGURES Slow Measurement SUBS USO ii oh eos oo Aw OS ewe ESS ees 17 Intermediate Measurement SubsysStemM ooooooooooooo oo 19 Fast Measurement Subsystemi i664 ce eew es eee de tee soe ee ewe 21 Very Fast Measurement Subsystem Hand Entry 23 Hardcopy Output Subsystems ESA AAA AR ES 24 Data Conditioning SUBS Stemi soe sete eke erayes 26 Trapezoidal Approximation subs ee bee eters Oa ina 27 viii VOLUME I CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Computers have been a key to the advance of science and engineering since their inception The computer has managed to enhance this progress by allowing scientists and engineers to carry out computations that would have been measured in man months rat
212. mation regarding manufacture and 264 experimental environment is necessary for future reference The print device data option is designed to support this documentation need TABLET requests the following information 1 manufacturer 2 device type 3 mask type 4 device number 5 temperature 6 second breakdown type 7 forward base current 8 nominal reverse base current 9 second breakdown reverse base current 10 comments The program will print the information on the internal printer in the order shown The operator will notice that entries six 6 through nine 9 are pertinent only to second breakdown characteristics Once the device data has been printed the program either will return to the digitization process section 11 3 2 if the curve is not complete or will notify the operator that the digitization is complete and ask for a softkey or key choice 11 7 New Curve Set When the operator decides to digitize a new set of curves TABLET will ask if the present data has been stored If the data has not been stored the program will return to the data storage cycle section 11 5 Otherwise the program will return to the beginning of the main program section 11 3 and wait for the operator to finish with the data preparation section 11 2 11 8 Finished When the operator is finished TABLET will ask if the present data has been stored If the data has not been stored the program will return to the
213. me Assign data buffer Choose desired function Load curve s Take new set of data Is present data present data stored stored Do you want to take more data 348 Load and run MUX flag Autost set Load and run VMAUX 349 Enter file name Wait 4500 Is file name Notify user file name is too long too long No Enter mass storage lt 6 cs 5 Are there more than Yes Enter curves to be entries 2 curves paired together valid No ce Wait 4500 Notify user entries incorrect 350 Notify user data storing Is there an Are attenuator etc both curves same type Yes 9 Wait 4500 Is entry Notify user valid entry incorrect the other curve Yes need conversion 351 Wait 4500 Notify user to pick Is there an Yes new mass storage error Yes No Is Is 610 error No error 63 130 No Notify user of Notify user of duplicate name unusual error you want to Purge duplicate file from storage purge Notify user to enter new file name 352 Turn off error Assign buffer to Gn No there another curve 9 mass storage file Store control registers to file Is Store one datum to MUX flag there another
214. medium is engaged properly e g disk door is closed 234 At this point PLOT will prompt the operator to choose a function 1 plet V voltage depress K1 2 plot I current depress K2 3 plot P power or product depress K3 4 plot U energy or integral depress K4 5 scale plot depress K5 6 new set of curves depress K6 7 finished depress K7 If the operator chooses any of the plot routines Kl through K4 the program checks to see whether or not the file has that curve For example an unprocessed file does not have a power or energy curve Also some curves will be stored as single curves Should the cule not be present in the file the program will notify the operator and go back to the key selections If the curve exists PLOT will proceed with the plotting process 2 3 Scaling Option If the scale plot option K5 is chosen PLOT will ask for a numerical scale factor The program compares the input to the valid range If the number is within the given range the program will store the scale factor and return to the key selections 2 4 New Curve Set Should the operator choose to plot a new set of curves K6 PLOT will ask for a new file name and revert to the beginning of the process outlined thus far 5 5 Quit If the operator is finished K7 PLOT will return to Autost For any of the plotting operations PLOT asks if the plot is to be made by itself This effects where the plot is placed on the page
215. ments HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit and HP3437A System Voltmeter b intermediate measurements Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope c fast measurements Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and d very fast measurements HP9111A Graphics Tablet 79 80 2 data storage HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive 3 data manipulation HP85 Desktop Computer and 4 data hardcopy output HP7470A Plotter In Chapter 3 these system components were grouped together to develop individual subsystems In the sections of Chapter 3 these subsystems were examined in detail Again these subsystems were to fulfill the system requirements at a subsystem level of organization In Chapter 4 the system organization and control was examined To foster a more complete understanding of the system capabilities tutorials were formulated which led the reader through the specific operations of the system Of course a more thorough explanation of the operations is contained in Appendix C User s Manual Finally in Chapter 5 the system was used to perform a series of benchmarking tests and the results were analyzed The accuracy for each operational subsystem was developed At this point a discussion of the effectiveness of the system seems appropriate In this case effectiveness would be judged by answering some simple questions 1 Did the system fulfill the goals set out in Chapter 1 a Is the system flexible b Is the system user friendly c Is the
216. ments of slower phenomena They are used to make up to four 4 16 point measurements These instruments are used during the storage cycle of the program This data is stored by the program and later processed using the VMAUX program 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM PROGRAMMABLE 40 REM DIGITIZER CONTROL 50 REM MAIN PROGRAM 60 REM 70 REM Copyright 8 13 84 80 REM gandalf software inc 90 REM Chuck Graves Wizard 100 REM 110 REM 120 COM x 10 130 OPTION BASE 1 CLEAR 140 DIM P 2 5 C 2 15 D 2 15 A3 128 B35 128 W1 200 W2 200 T 2 69 150 DIM S 512 D 2100 A 256 B 256 A2 128 B2 128 W 200 D1 2100 D2 2100 160 BEEP BEEP 170 DISP DISP Initializing 180 GOSUB 3220 190 CLEAR BEEP 200 DISP How many curves will be 210 DISP digitized and stored 1 2 220 INPUT P1 P1 IP P1 230 IF P1 1 OR Pl 2 THEN 270 240 CLEAR BEEP 250 DISP Please choose 1 or 2 260 WAIT 4500 GOTO 190 270 wS A 280 CLEAR BEEP 290 DISP Will this be a repetitive set 300 DISP of measurements at the same 310 DISP settings Y N 320 INPUT KS 330 GOSUB 5450 121 Make file name common Initialize registers Input integer curves Too many curves Yes notify user t Re enter curves No cont Set repetitive flag Aux meas routine 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530
217. n in flow chart form in Appendix C page 329 240 CHAPTER 8 USING TEKTRONIX 7612D AS A SINGLE SHOT OSCILLOSCOPE 8 1 Overview As mentioned in Chapter 7 the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer is designed primarily as a single shot oscilloscope The program 7612D was developed to use the digitizer in this capacity NORML discussed in Chapter 7 was developed to help the operator find adequate settings for single shot operations Thus the operator has cut down significantly the number of measurements before receiving a measurement worth storing After finding proper settings 7612D will work to store the measurement The program is designed to store up to two 2 curves with as many as 1024 points per curve From reading the digitizer s user s manual the operator will find that the digitizer can take multiple record readings 7612D is not designed to take this type of measurement The program will not allow more than one 1 record However the program will accommodate curves with any number of breakpoints Note For a discussion of breakpoints refer to the digitizer s user s manual 2612D allows for taking a set of measurements using the HP3497A DAS Control Unit and the HP3437A Digital Voltmeter during the storage cycle of the program The program also is designed to compensate for dc error voltages In addition 7612D has a section which will translate the voltages read for a curve into the true units In other words the program
218. n mass storage 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 2630 2640 2650 2660 2670 2680 2690 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 2750 2760 2770 2780 2790 2800 DISP transformer thermocouple etc DISP being used Y N INPUT Q IF Q Y THEN RETURN CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the conversion process 104 Meas reflect voltage Yes return No enter conversion DISP DISP For example a 6 dB atttenuator DISP converts a 2 volt input at the DISP source to a 1l volt input at the DISP scope So conversion is 2V to DISP 1V entered 2V 1V Enter using DISP scientific notation and proper DISP units A V K etc INPUT WS QS P 1 5 NUM WS LEN WS LEN WS IF NUM Q LEN Q LEN Q 86 THEN 2670 CLEAR BEEP DISP Incorrect entry The voltage DISP entry should be on the right DISP Re enter WAIT 4500 GOTO 2500 M VAL WS VAL Q RETURN REM REM REM SORT SUBROUTINE REM 1 FIND UNIT DIV REM REM G Y 1 1 H Y 1 1 FOR J 2 TO P I 4 IF Y I J lt G THEN G Y I J IF Y I J gt H THEN H Y I J NEXT J Input conversion string Assign cntl reg units RH entry voltage No notify user Re enter conversion t Calculate scale factor Set default minimum Set default maximum Set new minimum Set new maximum 2810 P 1 1 X I P 1 4 10 2820 P I 2 H G 8
219. n the data to reflect the measurement of interest e g current prior to storage After the conversion factor is entered the computer stores the conditioned data in the chosen mass storage media 20 If more than two 2 channels are monitored the computer requests the operator to input pairs of curves This is done because the mathematical processing program can only process a file with two 2 input curves As mentioned earlier the slow measurement subsystem is also available for use If the slow measurement subsystem is desired it is used during the storage phase of the intermediate measurement process As the data is being stored the software takes a measurement from the voltmeter This is done once every 256 storage cycles The interval of once every 256 storage cycles was arrived at because the program size allowed room for only 64 data points to be taken Thus under the greatest load on the system there are two 2 curves to be stored with 1024 points each Each point has an x coordinate and a y coordinate Therefore there are 4096 storage operations With a maximum auxiliary storage capacity of 64 points and a desire to monitor four 4 channels the software was left with 16 monitoring times Subdividing 4096 storage operations into 16 equal portions left a sample interval of once every 256 storage cycles This provides a sampling rate with approximately equivalent time steps throughout the sweep Also the limited availab
220. name of the auxiliary voltage file and its storage location What is name of the auxiliary voltage file associated with NICTST NICAUX Where is NICAUX stored DISK00 With this information the program then begins reading in the file The software then asks for the name for the auxiliary files one at a 39 Reading There are 2 curves Enter the name for curve 1 AUXFNI Enter the name for curve 2 AUXFN2 The program then stores each of the curves in a separate file under the name given above However before storing the files the software asks for the conversion processes associated with each curve If for example there is only one conversion process the first curve The interaction is Storing AUXFIN Is an attenuator current transformer thermocouple etc being used Y N Y What is the conversion process For example a 6dB attenuator converts a 2 volt input at the source to a l volt input at the scope So conversion is 2V to 1v entered 2V 1V Enter using scientific notation and include units A V K etc 2A IV As the curves are stored their data is scaled to reflect the conversion process Thus the stored data reflects the quantity of interest After reformatting the data files and storing them the software then asks if there are more curves which were stored during the measurement process Did you store any curves other than TRNTST Y N If more curves were stored then the program will return to the
221. nded energy change from 10 to 22d bkdn A returns as rounded units 2950 PRINT The change in energy from To 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 3050 3060 3070 3080 3090 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 3280 3290 3300 173 PRINT to 2nd breakdown is VALS A AS PRINT PRINTER IS 2 PLOTTER IS 705 GOTO 160 REM READ amp DRAW PLOT M 5 P1 5 IF I 2 THEN M 5 P1 5 P 1 4 S 0 2047 IF J Q THEN S P I 4 FOR L O TO S READ 1 M L X L O 1 NEXT L M 5 P1 5 K 1 P 1 4 IF T 1 THEN M 5 P1 5 P 1 4 P 2 4 IF I 2 THEN M 5 P1 5 2 P 1 4 P 2 4 FOR L 0 TO S READ 1 M L Y L 0 1 NEXT L FOR L 1 TO S O 1 PLOT X0 X L YO Y L B B 1 NEXT L O 0 L 1 IF J Q THEN B 1 RETURN REM FUNCTION FNA E 0 IF D lt 1 THEN 3250 GOSUB 3380 GOTO 3260 GOSUB 3500 GOSUB 3620 GOSUB 3860 RETURN REM FUNCTION FNB E 0 Close operation Return to main prog First value time 1 First value time 2 Last value last value last read Read time value 15 value mag 1 proc 15 value mag 1 unp 18t value mag 2 unp Read magn value Plot value move if 18t Set for plot not move Set start for next read Last read set for move Value less than 1 No division routine Yes multiply routine Rounding routine A Units routine 174 3310 IF D lt 1 THEN 3340 value less t
222. ng the current versus voltage curve The program operates in much the same way as the program PLOT First the program displays the message Initializing Unless I V is the first program to be called after applying power to the system the name of the last file to be processed is passed to the program Therefore the software asks first Where is TABTST stored TAPE DISK0O0 DISKO01 To this the operator responds DISK00 The program then displays the available options Currently operating on TABTST I V Scale New Set Finished The software then proceeds to ask for the axis titles which the operator desires What title do you want for the voltage axis of this 56 current vs voltage curve Vee What title do you want for the current axis of this current vs voltage curve Ic The program also has the ability to plot the curve on either a grid or an open graph Thus the software queries the operator for a preference of grid or graph Do you want a grid or graph To this the operator responds GRID The program then is ready to plot the curve Thus the software notifies the operator Load plotter and press CONTINUE Once the plotter is loaded the operator presses CONTINUE and the program carries out the plotting In so doing the software scans the data file for maximum and minimum values in both plots to automatically scale the size of the axes and read the data into memory 1024 points at a time Scanning A Scanning B Reading 1
223. ns The 7612D has two 2 programmable time bases with sampling times which range down to 5 nanoseconds The time bases also feature the ability to store sixteen 16 programmable points called breakpoints where the sample times can be changed If for example a l millisecond square wave is to be characterized very closely the 7612D can be 10 programmed to take data at 5 nanosecond intervals for the first 256 points at 10 microsecond intervals for the subsequent 96 points and at 5 nanosecond intervals for the remaining points Thus the risetime and fall time of the square wave can be measured very accurately without the need for an extraordinarily large memory capacity The 7612D can store two 2 traces Each trace has a programmable number of data points 256 512 1024 or 2048 Using this large memory capacity with the previously described breakpoints a very flexible measurement system was developed In addition the 7612D has one 1 programmable trigger and one 1 plug in for each time base Thus two 2 traces can be taken simultaneously which have very different time characteristics The possibility also exists to use all 4096 points in a single sweep by triggering time base B at the end of the time base A sweep This capability however is not utilized on the system Although the 7612D can store two 2 2048 point traces only 1024 points per curve are transferred to the computer This is due to the limited memory space on t
224. nt of Electrical Engineering at Texas Tech University This need was based upon the history of work carried out by the laboratory In developing the framework for a system to answer this need goals were established The three 3 co equal goals were to 1 develop a system which was easy to use by an operator with minimal exposure to a computer 2 develop a system which could be used on a variety of experiments of interest to the laboratory and 3 develop a system which could carry out data acquisition manipulation and storage in a timely manner To achieve these goals specific system requirements were defined based upon both on going research work and anticipated projects In Chapter 2 these specific requirements were examined and specific components chosen These components were selected based upon system requirements availability and financial attractiveness The system requirements were organized by function 1 data acquisition 2 data storage 3 data manipulation and 4 data hardcopy output Within the category of data acquisition further categorization occurred based upon time sampling requirements 1 slow measurements 2 intermediate measurements 3 fast measurements and 4 very fast measurements hand entry Specific system components were selected to accomplish the duties defined by these requirements The system components which were defined to fulfill the system requirements were 1 data acquisition a slow measure
225. nterface was configured for for 16 bit words 390 used If the Statement is valid check the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the proper mode or configuration required for the statement used Try recycling the I O power turn the computer off then back on again If the error keeps recurring contact the authorized HP 85 dealer or the HP sales and service office from which you purchased your HP 85 ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions Error Number amp Code 114 115 116 Error Condition An interface dependent error HPR IB The statement used requires the interface to be active controller Serial Receiver buffer overrun data has been lost BCD Port 10 not currently available GPIO FHS TRANSFER aborted by STO An interface dependent error HP IB The statement used requires the interface to be addressed to talk Serial Automatic disconnect forced BCD FHS TRANSFER aborted by FLGB GPIO Interface configuration does not allow an output enable or output operation on Port A or Port B An interface dependent error HP IB The statement used requires the interface to be addressed to listen Serial This error number not currently used BCD Data direction mismatch on current operation GPIO Cannot start operation b
226. ntry does not include the units S for seconds M for minutes or the entry exceeds the maximum sample interval the program will notify the operator of the error and ask for a valid entry Once HP DAS has received a valid entry the program will ask for the total time over which to take samples Since the program is limited to 256 points the maximum total time is 256 times the sample interval Again if the entry does not include the units S for seconds M for minutes or the entry exceeds the maximum total time HP DAS will notify the operator of the error and ask for a valid entry From the sample time and the total time entries the program calculates the number of data to be taken and stores the date and starting time 10 3 Data A isiti HP DAS will notify the operator that the program is taking data The program then will choose a channel and set the voltage range After setting up the measurement HP DAS waits 5 s to allow the voltage to settle Then the program triggers the voltmeter stores the voltage reading and stores the time of the measurement If there is more than one l channel the program repeats the process for each channel in the same manner 256 Once HP DAS has taken a measurement for all of the channels the program waits for a period equal to the sample time If the total time has mot expired the program will repeat the process of data acquisition Otherwise HP DAS will notify the operator that the progr
227. o 1 Appendix A Program Liatings TABLET and 2 Appendix A User s Manual Chapter 10 Graphics Tablet Control Package 3 3 Hardcopy Output Subsystem The hardcopy output subsystem was developed using the HP85 Desktop Computer the HP9895A Flexible Disk and the HP7470A Plotter These units are tied together using the software packages named PLOT and I Y Figure 3 5 shows the block diagram of the hardcopy output subsystem HP7470A ESOO Plotter HP Interface Bus HPIB MEP UY MY AU AU A A AU AUT A AT AMP ANY A HP85 HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive Desktop Computer Figure 3 5 Hardcopy Output Subsystem This software was designed to 1 plot one 1 of four 4 curves 2 scale the size of the output 3 either plot all four 4 plots on a single page or plot each curve on a separate page 4 generate a set of second breakdown characteristics for a processed set of curves The operator chooses the name of a data file The software then allows the operator to choose from among the noted options The first option allows the operator to choose one 1 of four 4 curves to be plotted The plots this software package generates are 1 current 2 voltage 3 power 4 energy The latter two 2 curves exist only for the processed data files Therefore the software was 25 developed with provisions that distinguish processed files from unprocessed files Since the processed and unprocessed d
228. o conversion is 2V to 1V entered 2V 1V Enter using scientific notation and include units A V K etc 2A IV As the curves are stored their data is scaled to reflect the conversion process Thus the stored data reflects the quantity of interest After reformatting the data files and storing them the software then asks if there are more curves which were stored during the measurement process Did you store any curves other than TRNTST Y N If there are more curves stored then the program returns to the initialization process in VMAUX Otherwise the software notifies the operator that Autost is being loaded and run MISSION CONTROL will now resume control 4 Very Fa Measuremen ub tem Tutorial Hand Entry When the operator chooses to use the very fast measurement subsystem the program TABLET is loaded and run First the program displays the message Initializing r then proceeds to set the default values for variables in the program and initializes the data registers The program then makes a hardcopy on the printer of the functions assigned to the softkeys on the graphics 47 tablet Softkey Assignments 1 END End of curve Digitize to start next curve 2 STORE Transfer curves to tape or disk 3 NEW SET Reinitialize and process new set of curves 4 FINISHED Finished with this progran 5 DEVICE DATA Print out device data 6 16 Not used After notifying the operator of the options available on the graphic
229. o store B IF W C THEN A P 1 4 P 2 4 Set to store both B 2 A 5 P1 5 Calculate file space ON ERROR GOTO 4910 Trap file create error CREATE X B 8 Create file space OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO X Open file I 10 J 8 PRINT 1 1 Pl Store curves PRINT 1 2 I t Store time div PRINT 1 3 J Store voltage div PRINT 1 4 P 1 3 Store date PRINT 1 5 P 2 3 Store start time 4360 P 1 2 P 1 2 M P 2 2 P 2 2 N 4370 K 6 4380 FOR I 1 TO 2 4390 IF P 1 1 0 THEN 4440 4400 FOR J 1 TO 5 4410 PRINTS 1 K P I J 4420 K K 1 4430 NEXT J 4440 NEXT I 4450 T 2 65 TIME 4460 IF WS B THEN 4600 4470 A 1 B 0 4480 FOR I 1 TO Al 4490 FOR J A TO C 1 1 1 4500 X J A 1 C 2 1 0 B 134 Control reg used Yes store cntl reg No next cntl reg Set aux start time Store time A Yes Store to next bkpt Calculate time A beginning index for present sampling time B time at end of last sample time period offset time C 2 I present sampling time for timebase A 4510 PRINT 1 K X 4520 K K 1 Store time A 4530 IF FP J 1 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB 5930 Take desire auxiliary measurement if n 256th operation 4540 NEXT J 4550 A C 1 I 1 1 4560 B X 4570 NEXT I 4580 PRINT 1 6 X 10 4590 IF W A THEN 4740 4600 A 1 B 0 4610 FOR I 1 TO Bl 4620 FOR J A TO D 1 1 1 4630 X J A 1 D 2 1 O B Set new start index Set new offset
230. oad and run i NORML Yes Notify user MUX is OFF Notify user VM is OFF Load and run 7612D Is disk drive Notify user disk drive is OFF on 2 Nicolet Notify user Nicolet is OFF Yes Do you want to use No Load and run NIC85 MUX 8 VM 287 Notify user MUX is OFF Notify user VM is OFF Load and run NIC85 288 Is disk drive Notify user disk on drive is OFF Yes Yes Yes Notify user MUX is OFF Notify user VM is OFF Load and run CH HP DAS Is Notify user disk disk drive drive is OFF on Notify user graphics graphics tablet tablet is OFF on Load and run TABLET 290 291 MATH The MATH program conducts all mathematical processing The program reads in stored data for voltage and current and generates a time frame for processing based upon the two 2 sets of time data read into the computer The program interpolates linearly the voltage and current data onto this time frame Then the power and energy curves associated with the voltage and current curves The MATH program calculates the instantaneous power curve by taking the product of the voltage and current values The energy curve is calculated by performing an integration of the power curve using a trapezoidal approximation Finally the MATH program stores the processed data files The
231. ognize the disk drive and generates the error mentioned previously ERROR 131 CARTRIDGE 224 OUT If the computer should generate ERROR 131 1 type MASS STORAGE IS D700 2 press ENDLINE 3 repeat steps 4 and 5 from the previous procedure This should load and run the central processing program Autost without any problems 2 4 Reference A complete outline of the startup procedure is given in flow chart form in Appendix A 225 CHAPTER 3 CENTRAL PROGRAM CONTROL 3 1 Overview As mentioned in the previous chapter the central processing program Autost serves as the nerve center of the system The principal operations of Autost are 1 initialization of the system clock and calendar 2 polling devices to see if they are present on the HPIB and 3 loading and running the necessary programs for the data acquisition and conditioning processes Once the operator has completed the system startup procedures outlined in Chapter 2 Autost will begin to carry out these operations 3 2 Input Types The program will prompt the operator periodically for input These prompts will take two 2 forms The first form will be requests for typed information i e operator must type in a response The second form will be a list of key assignments Whenever the program requests typed information type one 1 of the responses requested by the computer The valid responses are in parentheses next to the question The information is
232. ogram asks whether or not the operator wishes to take more data If so HP DAS returns to the main program setup section 10 2 and begins the entire process again Otherwise the program will return to autost 10 5 Reference A complete outline of HP DAS is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 356 through 360 258 CHAPTER 11 GRAPHICS TABLET CONTROL PACKAGE 41 1 Overview In addition to taking data directly from measurement devices discussed in Chapters 7 through 10 the SYSTEMS software package contains a program TABLET for digitizing data by hand TABLET was developed as a complement to the other programs since the system would be limited by the resolution of the measurement equipment and by the date the measurement equipment was first used The program takes care of these two 2 problems and allows the operator to enter almost any type of graphics data TABLET will allow digitization of two 2 curves with a maximum of 512 data points each The program will compensate the data for any rotational errors due to poor orientation of the curves on the tablet surface In addition the program allows the operator to print out pertinent test information 11 2 Data Preparation TABLET is developed to allow entry of data from almost any type of media The program is developed so that the operator only need attach the media e g photographs manuscript or periodical to the graphics tablet and run the program The operator
233. oline offset error for curve B p 2 2 timebase B voltage per division Values in D2 vary from 0 to 255 4830 PRINT 1 K Y Store voltage B 4840 K K 1 136 4850 IF FP I 1 256 0 AND V Y THEN GOSUB 5930 Take desired auxiliary measurement if n 256t4 operation 4860 NEXT I 4870 ASSIGN 1 TO Close file 4880 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND Cl 1 AND W A THEN W B If storing a second curve separately set value for next pass 4890 IF V Y THEN GOSUB 6120 Store aux data 4900 RETURN 4910 OFF ERROR 4920 IF ERRN 63 THEN 5020 File already exist 4930 CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 4940 DISP File already exists Do you want 4950 DISP to purge Y N 4960 INPUT Q Purge existing file 4970 IF QS Y THEN PURGE X GOTO 4270 Yes purge amp cont 4980 CLEAR BEEP No enter new name 4990 DISP Enter another name 5000 INPUT X 5010 GOTO 4260 Retry storage 5020 IF ERRN 130 THEN 4270 Disk error no retry 5030 CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 5040 DISP Disk error Re enter storage 5050 WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 1080 Re assign mass storage 5060 REM 5070 REM 5080 REM ZERO COMPENSATION 5090 REM SUBROUTINE 5100 REM 1 COMPENSATE FOR 5110 REM ZERO ERROR 5120 REM 5130 REM 5140 IF Q1 A OR Q1S B THEN A 1 Set for single curve 5150 IF Ql C THEN A 2 Q1S A Set for both curves 5160 SEND 7 UNL MTA LISTEN 2 SCG 1 Listener left plugin 5170 OUTPUT 7 A2 1 6 V D amp VALS A2 amp CPL
234. orial A 26 gt Summary A EA SYSTEM ACCURACY s oi a AA A eas Rie Sas 5st Introd cti n Ra ee ae ads 5 2 Analysis of Acquisition System Accuracy 5 2 1 Definitions of A D Conversion Accuracy 5 2 2 Errors in Successive Approximation A D 3 4 9 6 7 am won y N N N N ND CONVETS TOM catas a A Errors in Direct Conversion A D Processes HP System Voltmeter MeasurementS Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope Measurements Tektronix Programmable Digitizer Measurements HP Graphics Tablet Measurements 5 3 Analysis of Data Conditioning Accuracy 5 3 1 System Time Resolution lt lt nes si aw nee ws wea Now ees 5 3 2 Computational ACCUTAC Y Lidia de He tee ee 5 3 3 Value Selection ACCUraCy ini DE SUMMA car AS e aa 6 SUMMARY AND CONCLUS TONS va 4 dj o ww A RT Se SG is SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPEY ooooooooooooooooooooooooononooonnoooo o APPENDICES As PROGRAM LISTINGS ie via LEE SS eh ew we eee B PROGRAM PROTECTION CODES ooooooccoonnononononoononoo VOLUME II Es USER S MANUAL 220 LARES e A ARA Sy Sa 32 34 40 46 51 57 59 61 61 61 62 63 65 66 66 67 68 69 69 71 76 77 79 83 216 ABSTRACT This thesis discusses the development of a data acquisition and conditioning system including the definition of laboratory needs subsystem and system development phases system tutorial and error ana
235. ost a Close buffer Yes data 1 to file Is there an attenuator etc Notify user Sort maximum and entry incorrect minimum voltage Compute x div and y div Store y data Compute factor Store control data 2 Store x data 361 TABLET The TABLET program controls the HP9111A Graphics Tablet The tablet is used to digitize up to two 2 1024 point curves by hand The operator enters the corners of the graph the number of x divisions value per x division time the number of y divisions value per y divisions e g voltage and the location of the zero line The program uses these values to correct the data for rotational and translational digitizing errors and scales the data to represent the curves digitized i e converts xy coordinates to voltage vs time data This converted data is stored The TABLET program also allows the operator to generate a hardcopy of device data The program will list manufacturer device type mask type device number temperature second breakdown type forward base current nominal reverse base current reverse base current at second breakdown and comments These device data are not stored however 362 Yes Set defaults Initialize registers e Was data No Print hardcopy of digitized softkey functions Enter of curves Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect No Was Yes softkey
236. other name INPUT X GOTO 2950 Retry storage IF ERRN 130 THEN 2960 Disk error no retry CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 GOTO 2780 Re assign mass storage REM REM REM DEVICE DATA REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP PRINTER IS 2 Use thermal printer PRINT PRINT Manufacturer DISP Enter manufacturer INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Device type CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter device type INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Mask type or other applicable PRINT data CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter mask type or other DISP applicable data 3620 3630 3640 3650 3660 3670 3680 3690 3700 3710 3720 3730 3740 3750 3760 3770 3780 3790 3800 3810 3820 3830 3840 3850 3860 3870 3880 3890 3900 3910 3920 3930 3940 3950 157 INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Device number CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter device number INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Temperature CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter temperature RT or DISP degrees C INPUT D PRINT DS C PRINT PRINT SB type CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter SB type N A B or C INPUT D PRINT DS PRINT PRINT Forward base current CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter forward base current INPUT D PRINT D PRINT PRINT Reverse base current PRINT PRINT Nominal CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter nominal reverse base DIS
237. own The hardcopy options outlined are contained in the program called PLOT However the system has a second program called I V This program was designed from the PLOT program I V was generated to provide the ability to plot a curve of the current versus voltage This capability was not included in PLOT because the memory capacity of the computer was restricted to 24 kilobytes When PLOT is loaded there is insufficient room for the portion of the software which generates the current versus voltage curve This hardcopy output process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 3 a sample experiment is performed with the human 26 machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program PLOT including computer prompts and operator responses Fox further details regarding these programs consult the following references 1 Appendix A Program Listings PLOT 2 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 4 Plotting Package 3 Appendix A Program Listings I V and 4 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 5 I vs V Plotting Package 3 4 Mathematical Conditioning Subsystem As was pointed out in section 2 5 the system required a limited capability for computation This computational subsystem is composed of the HP85 Desk top Computer and the HP9895A Flexible Disk Drive Figure 3 6 shows the block diagram of the computational subsystem This software computes a power curve and an energy c
238. proceeds to read the applicable time values These time values are then sorted together to produce a set of common times This portion of the program is announced by the display Initial read and sort Having developed a full set of time values by sorting together all the available times and discarding any redundant times the program then creates a file of sufficient size to store the file which is to be processed The software displays Creating file space The program then carries out the processing The first step in the processing is the interpolation of the curves Each curve is composed of a finite number of samples The equations for each of these lines 58 are calculated These lines are then evaluated for each of the time values This is performed in a three part process of reading evaluating and storing During the interpolation of the voltage curve the computer displays Process 1 of Reading 1 of Process 1 of Working 1 of Process 1 of Storing 1 of 1 hb p A pp A Next the current curve is interpolated evaluated and stored During this process the computer displays Process 2 of 4 Reading 1 of Process 2 of Working 1 of Process 2 of Storing 1 of KH a pa p After finishing the interpolations a power curve is calculated This is done by performing a point by point multiplication of the voltage and the current curves During this process the computer displays Process 3 of 4 Reading 1 of 1 Process 3 of 4
239. r things how many curves are stored Based on this the program will load the curves NIC85 will notify the user that only 1024 points will be stored from each curve If the Nicolet has more than 1024 points in a curve the program will take data from the curve at regular intervals For example if the Nicolet has a curve with 4096 points the program will store every fourth point NIC85 will check the number of curves If there are more than four 4 curves the progam will notify the operator of the error and return to the beginning of the data acquisition process Otherwise the program will load the normalization factors for all of the curves After loading the normalization factors NIC85 loads the curve data 9 4 Main P E ti After loading the curve data NIC85 will prompt the operator to choose a function 1 store all data depress K1 2 process a new set of curves depress K2 3 finished depress K3 If the operator chooses to process a new set of curves the program will ask whether or not the present data is stored If so the program will 250 return to the main program setup section 9 2 Otherwise NIC85 will proceed to the data storage process section 9 5 If the operator is finished NIC85 will ask if the present data is stored If not the program will proceed to the data storage process section 9 5 Otherwise the program will ask whether or not the operator wants to take more data If the operator wants to tak
240. rage option ON KEY 3 NEW SET GOTO 790 New data set option ON KEY 4 FINIS GOTO 790 Finished option ON KEY 5 SPECS GOSUB 3420 Device specs option KEY LABEL FOR J 1 TO 512 GOSUB 2330 Active tablet routine IF B 7 AND T 1 5 THEN GOSUB 3420 GOTO 570 If softkey 5 digitized device spec routine amp return to act tab IF B 7 AND T 1 gt 5 THEN GOSUB 3970 GOTO 570 If softkey gt 5 digitized unused softkey routine IF B 7 THEN 2470 Other softkey branch NEXT J CLEAR BEEP DISP Storage file is full Do you DISP wish to re enter data Y N INPUT Q Re enter data IF Q Y THEN 160 Yes start over P 1 4 J 1 Store of pts in crv 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 148 NEXT 1 CLEAR BEEP DISP Digitization process is DISP complete Please press key or DISP digitize softkey to continue KEY LABEL GOSUB 2330 Active tablet routine IF B 7 THEN 750 Loop until softkey IF T 1 5 THEN GOSUB 3420 GOTO 690 If softkey 5 digitized device spec routine amp return to act tab IF T 1 gt 5 THEN GOSUB 3970 GOTO 690 If softkey gt 5 digitized unused softkey routine GOTO 2470 Other softkey branch P I 4 J 1 Store of pts in crv CLEAR BEEP DISP Have you stored the present set DISP of curves Y N INPUT Q Data stored IF Q Y THE
241. ram execution where the operator is asked whether or not to take more data section 9 4 9 9 Reference A complete outline of NIC85 is given in flow chart form in Appendix C pages 345 through 354 254 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MULTIPLEXER AND SYSTEM VOLTMETER CONTROL PACKAGE In Chapters 7 through 9 use of the two 2 fastest data takers the Tektronix 7612D Programmable Digitizer and the Nicolet 4090 III Digital Oscilloscope was discussed The software controlling those machines was designed to store data for a sweep up to 20 megasamples per second 20 megasamples per second corresponds to a 5 ns sampling period In addition those programs were capable of taking an auxiliary set of much slower measurements using the HP3497A DAS Control Unit and the HP3437A System Voltmeter The SYSTEMS software package also has a stand alone program BP DAS for controlling the auxiliary data takers HP DAS will monitor a maximum of four 4 channels at 256 points per channel The program structure is quite simple HP DAS operates much as a system clock The program can delay up to 27 775 minutes between sample sets Since the storage capacity of the program is 256 points the operator can take measurements over a maximum period of approximately 4 days 22 5 hours This time scale is better suited for measurement of such quantities as temperature humidity and barometric pressure During each storage operation HP DAS has built in delay of approximately 2 s
242. rator has two 2 courses of action The first course is to press LOCAL on the front panel and manually arm the time base being used This is done by pressing the appropriate switch on the front panel and taking another measurement 244 This procedure is fine if the operator feels that the settings are correct but the measurement went awry The second course is to press CONTINUE and allow 7612D to take control This is an alternative to the previous process and is desireable if the operator feels the settings are inadequate The program will ask whether or not the operator wishes to keep the data If so the program will proceed to read the curve Otherwise 2612D will ask whether or not the operator wishes to change the instrument settings If so the program will return to the instrument setup section 8 2 3 Otherwise the program will re arm the digitizer and await a measurement 8 4 Data Storage Should the operator choose to keep the data 7612D will read the channel s The program will ask where the operator wishes the data to be stored Next the program will ask for a file name The file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a file name 7612D will ask the operator to enter a valid name If the operator is storing two 2 curves the program checks to see if both curves are the same type e g both curves are current If the curves are the same the program notifies the operator of the e
243. rea The PLOT program allows the operator to plot curves singularly or in groups and to scale the size of the plot Also the program allows the plots to be made on either a grid or an open graph Finally the PLOT program allows the operator to generate a set of second breakdown statistics if processed data is being used The program will print values for voltage current power energy and time at second breakdown for time t at 10 of second breakdown voltage for voltage current power and energy at time t for time from t to second breakdown for change in energy from t to second breakdown 161 10 REM PLOT PACKAGE 20 REM MAIN PROGRAM 30 REM Copyright 11 20 84 40 COM x 10 Make file name common 50 SHORT X 2048 Y 2048 P 3 5 60 DIM A 40 70 GOSUB 4060 Initialization routine 80 IF X NULL THEN 130 Plot first prog 90 CLEAR BEEP Yes enter file name 100 DISP What is the name of the file 110 INPUT X Input file name 120 IF LEN X gt 10 THEN CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large WAIT 4500 GOTO 90 If name is too long notify user and re enter file name 130 CLEAR BEEP No set mass storage 140 OFF ERROR 150 DISP Where is X stored 160 DISP TAPE DISK00 DISKO01 170 INPUT R Input data storage 180 GOSUB 650 Mass storage routine 190 ON ERROR GOTO 600 Trap file error 200 ASSIGN 1 TO X Open file 210 OFF ERROR 220 READ 1 1 P1 Read of cu
244. reakdown Print value of current at time To Read value of voltage Assign proper at time To string prefix Round to 3 significant digits voltage at To value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Is current at To value lt 1 Round to 3 significant digits Assign proper Read value of current string prefix at time To Print value of voltage at time To Print value of energy at time To Read value of power Assign proper at time To string prefix Round to 3 Is significant digits power at To value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Is energy at To value lt 1 Round to 3 significant digits Assign proper Read value of energy string prefix at time To Print value of power at time To Take plotter out of Print change in energy from To to print mode 2nd breakdown
245. rectable and are not discussed in the following text Examining the monotonicity of the acquired waveform will provide the information necessary to decide whether or not the device has stuck bits As noted earlier this could be a problem of a continuously stuck bit or a sporadically stuck bit However due to the fact that the 7612D does not have an intrinsic problem with differential non linearity the determination as to whether or not there were stuck bits proved rather simple One 1 last error which may occur in data acquisition with the 7612D is the possibility of non linearity in the sweep circuit This 66 will cause the beam to sweep across one 1 portion of the target more quickly than another This will not effect monotonicity However it will appear as a non linear error comparable to that noted for gain error This non linear sweep will manifest itself as a repetitive pattern equivalent to that noted for gain error 5 2 4 HP System Voltmeter Measurements In accordance with the rationale set forth in section 5 2 2 a triangular waveform was measured using the HP System Voltmeter The waveform was a 4 volt triangular wave with a frequency of approximately 2 mHz millihertz The waveform was digitized approximately once every 3 168 s This data was then examined for any indications of the errors set forth in section 5 2 2 First the data was examined for evidence of gain error This type of error can be identified by a rep
246. red DISP file INPUT X IF LEN X gt 0 AND LEN X lt 11 THEN 130 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Pick a name DISP with less than 11 letters WAIT 4500 GOTO 580 CLEAR BEEP DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 205 Read routine Input new file name File name too long Yes notify user Re enter file name Storage routine Another set of curves No return to Autost Yes enter file name File name too long Yes notify user Re enter file name t Return to Autost 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 BEEP 65 1 20 NEXT 1 CHAIN Autost D700 EXD REM REM REM REM REM REM FOR FOR NEXT J NEXT I INITIALIZATION SUBROUTINE I 1 TO 2 J 1 TO 69 A I J 0 FOR I 1 TO 5 P I 0 NEXT I R D700 Pl 1 P 5 86 Default of curves units RETURN REM REM REM 1000 ON 1010 ASSIGN 1 TO YS 1020 ASSIGN 2 TO X 1030 OFF ERROR 1040 READ 2 4 P 2 SUBROUTINE READ CURVE READ DATE amp TIME CLOSE FILES ERROR GOTO 1300 206 Load Autost prog Initialize work reg Initialize control reg Default mass storage V Trap disk errors Open aux file Open main file Read date 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1
247. responds to this query NICAUX The computer then begins storing the auxiliary data Storing data in NICAUX This storage process is not in a standard format This difference was pointed out in the previous chapters Therefore once the rest of the operations are completed the software loads and runs the program VMAUX After completing this storage process the software asks Have you stored the present set of curves Y N 38 Of course the curves have been stored Thus the operator enters Y Having completed the storage process the computer asks for further data Do you wish to digitize another set of curves Y N If the operator chooses to take another set of curves then the entry is made Y Whereupon the software returns to the acquisition beginning with the initialization If on the other hand the operator is finished with the acquisition process then the entry is made N At that point the software will load and run one of two programs For the case of no auxiliary voltage measurements the software loads and runs the program Autost In that case the software displays MISSION CONTROL will now resume control For the case where auxiliary measurements are taken the software loads and runs the program VMAUX This program is designed to reformat the auxiliary file data into a form consistent with the rest of the files After loading VMAUX the program proceeds by displaying Initializing The program first asks for the
248. rithms are investigated Time resolution reflects the system s ability to resolve between two 2 adjacent points in time The closer in time the points are the 70 greater the resolution of the system This resolution is set by the digitizing rate of the selected device The maximum resolution is equivalent to the minimum sample period The minimum sample period varies from device to device For the components of this system the minimum sampling periods are 1 100 ms for the HP Data Acquisition Control Unit 2 500 ns for the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope 3 5 ns for the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer and 4 1 mm for the HP Graphics Tablet Of course the resolution of the HP Graphics Tablet is given in millimeters rather than some derivative of seconds since it is an x y format device This length resolution can be related to an equivalent maximum time resolution in the following manner For a standard oscilloscope the grid format is 10 mm per division Most modern oscilloscope cameras produce a 1 1 reproduction of the oscilloscope trace Thus the resolution of the HP Graphics Tablet corresponds to 01 division For data stored at 1 ns division the HP Graphics Tablet resolution is 10 ps For example data quoted in Chapter 4 was digitized using the HP Graphics Tablet Hence the resolution of the time data being used for example material is approximately 10 ps In general the time resolution of any system component is equal to th
249. rogram is capable of compensating the curve for any rotational error as great as 180 degrees If the operator does not digitize the corners in that specific order the program will rotate the curve incorrectly TABLET also uses the corners to calculate the distance from the horizontal and vertical boundaries of the graphics tablet Thus the program can calculate the origin of the graph and compensate for the offsets These offsets are necessary to store the digitized curve in an area which is bounded by the graph on the graphics tablet and not the graphics tablet itself Next TABLET asks for the number of horizontal and vertical divisions on the graph and the value per division of the vertical and horizontal axes The program uses these entries to calculate the scale factors to scale the values being entered All data entered from the graphics tablet is in x y format The graph being digitized however is not necessarily x y in nature The graph may be voltage vs time or current vs temperature Therefore the program needs the previous data entries to calculate the proper values for the data being digitized After calculating the scaling factors TABLET will ask for the position of the zeroline This entry allows the operator to use data which has positive and negative values The operator needs to enter the position relative to graph For example if the zeroline is 3 5 divisions above the graph boundary the operator will enter 3 5 The entry
250. rograms For the case of no auxiliary voltage measurements the software will load and run the program Autost In that case the software displays MISSION CONTROL will now resume control For the case where auxiliary measurements are taken the software loads and runs the program VMAUX This program was designed to reformat the auxiliary file data into a form consistent with the rest of the files After loading VMAUX the program proceeds by displaying Initializing gt The program first asks for the name of the auxiliary voltage file and its storage location What is name of the auxiliary voltage file associated with TRNTST TRNAUX Where is TRNAUX stored DISK00 With this information the program then begins reading the file The software then asks for the name for the auxiliary files one at a time Reading There are 2 curves Enter the name for curve 1 AUXFNA Enter the name for curve 2 AUXFNB The program then stores each of the curves in a separate file under the name given above However before storing the files the software asks for the conversion processes associated with each curve In this case there is only one conversion process that being for the first curve The interaction is Storing AUXFNA Is an attenuator current 46 transformer thermocouple etc being used Y N Y What is the conversion process For example a 6dB attenuator converts a 2 volt input at the source to a l1l volt input at the scope S
251. rompted to enter a file name if the system was just turned on Otherwise the program presumes the operator wishes to work on the curves which were just taken 4 2 Main Program MATH will request the location of the curves i e which mass storage device The program will load the curves from that device if possible The program was developed to trap mass storage errors However MATH will not test to see if a file is on the mass storage device If the file is not on the mass storage device the operator will be notified and the program will stop In this case change the medium e g floppy disk or tape and rerun the program If MATH generates a mass storage medium error enter a different mass storage device or make sure the medium is engaged properly e g disk drive door is closed At this point MATH will verify whether or not the file can be processed If not the program will ask whether or not the operator wishes to process a different set of curves Should the operator not wish to process a different file the program will return to Autost Otherwise MATH will request a file name and repeat the aforementioned verificaton process 230 4 3 Processing Once MATH has obtained the name of a file which can be processed the program will proceed to read both of the stored curves The program then carries out the following processes 1 reads through both curves to find the time frame which is common 2 sorts all time values within t
252. rror and asks whether or not the operator wants to store the curves separately If the operator does not wish to store the curves separately 7612D returns to the true unit computation section 8 2 6 Otherwise the operator is notified the curves will be stored in the order channel A then channel B a software flag is set to indicate the curves will be Stored separately If the curves are not the same or are flagged to be separated or only one 1 curve is to be stored 7612D will notify the operator the data is being stored 8 4 1 File Creation Errors 1612D will attempt to create a file for storage At this point two 2 common errors arise One 1 is a duplicate file error This 245 arises when the program attempts to create a file that already exists on the mass storage device The program will notify the user of the error 1612D then asks whether or not the operator wishes to purge the existing file If so 2612D will purge the existing file and create the file for storage Otherwise the program will ask for a new file name With the new file name the program will try to create a file again The second common error arises from a problem with the mass storage device Typically the problem comes from telling 7612D to create a file on a mass storage device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage and return to the beginning of the data
253. rst creates a file on the disk and then stores the data During the storage cycle the software displays Storing data in DASTST After completing the storage process the software queries Do you want to take another set of data Y N If the operator wishes to take another set of measurements then the entry is made Y and the software displays the message Re initializing The software then resets the default values re initializes the data registers and returns to the segment of the program described in the beginning of this section where the operator was asked to enter the number of channels to be monitored If the operator does not wish to take another set of curves then the entry is made N and the program displays the message MISSION CONTROL will now resume control At this point the software loads and runs the program Autost described in the previous section When the operator chooses to use the intermediate measurement subsystem the program NIC 85 is loaded and run First the program 35 displays the message Initializing then proceeds to set the default values for variables in the program and to initialize the data registers Since the intermediate measurement subsystem was designed to make auxiliary voltage measurements if desired the software asks Do you want to use the system voltmeter to make additional measurements Y N If the operator chooses to use the auxiliary system then the entry is mad
254. rves 230 IF P1 gt 2 THEN T 2 P1 2 P1 gt 2 for processed file 240 READ 1 2 P 3 1 Read horiz divisions 250 READ 1 3 P 3 2 Read vert divisions 260 K 6 270 FOR I 1 TO Pl 280 FOR J 1 TO 5 290 READ 1 K P I J Read control registers 300 K K 1 310 NEXT J 320 NEXT I 330 READ 1 4 P 1 3 Read meas date 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 READ 1 5 P 2 3 CLEAR BEEP DISP Currently operating on X ON KEY 1 Plot V GOTO 850 ON KEY 2 Plot I GOTO 920 ON KEY 3 Plot P GOTO 990 ON KEY 4 Plot U GOTO 1020 ON KEY 5 Scale GOTO 730 ON KEYS 6 New Set GOTO 460 ON KEY 7 Finished GOTO 510 KEY LABEL GOTO 450 ASSIGN 1 TO CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the new file name INPUT X GOTO 120 ASSIGN 1 TO CLEAR BEEP DISP MISSION CONTROL DISP will now resume control FOR I 1 TO 65 BEEP 65 I 20 NEXT I CHAIN Autost D700 END OFF ERROR IF ERRN 130 THEN 200 CLEAR BEEP DISP Disk error Re enter storage WAIT 4500 GOTO 130 IF R TAPE THEN 710 IF R DISK01 THEN 690 MASS STORAGE IS D700 GOTO 720 162 Read meas time Plot voltage option Plot current option Plot power option Plot energy option Change scale option New data set option Finished option Loop until choice Close file Input new file name
255. rwise read time 2740 NEXT J 2750 P 3 4 J S1 of data pts read 2760 FOR J S1 T1 TO S2 T1 201 2770 READ 1 J 3 Y J 81 T1 1 Read magnitude 2780 NEXT J 2790 1 S2 1 Set for next read cycle 2800 RETURN 2810 REM 2820 REM 2830 REM STORE SUBROUTINE 2840 REM 1 STORE ALL 2850 REM CURVES 2860 REM 2870 REM 2880 FOR J 1 TO 12 2890 IF O 15 OR K 4 THEN PRINT 2 0 J X J If only time data or integral data store x values 2900 IF 0 15 AND K 4 THEN PRINT 2 0 J Y J Otherwise store y values 2910 NEXT J 2920 0 0 12 Setup next start index 2930 PRINT 2 9 P 1 4 Store of pts curve 1 2940 PRINT 2 14 P 2 4 Store of pts curve 2 2950 I2 0 J J 1 Reset storage index 2960 RETURN 2970 REM 2980 REM 2990 REM INITIALIZATION 3000 REM SUBROUTINE 3010 REM _3020 REM 3030 CLEAR BEEP 3040 DISP DISP Initializing 3050 FOR I 1 TO 256 3060 X I 0 t Initialize time reg 3070 Y 1 0 Initialize magn reg 3080 2 1 0 t Initialize temp reg 3090 NEXT I 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 3280 3290 3300 3310 3320 3330 3340 3350 3360 202 FOR I 1 TO 3 FOR J 1 TO 5 P I J 0 Initialize cntl reg NEXT J NEXT I FOR I 1 TO 4 FOR J 1 TO 256 M I J 0 Initialize intrp reg NEXT J NEXT I FOR I 1 TO 2 FOR J 1 TO 2 R I J 0 Initialize trnc reg NEXT J NEXT I FOR I 257 TO 2048 X
256. s 1024 points per curve is loaded and evaluated while the y data is loaded evaluated and stored 256 points at a time This computational process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 4 a sample experiment is performed with the human machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program MATH including computer prompts and operator responses For further details regarding this program refer to 1 Appendix A Program Listings MATH and 2 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 3 Mathematical Processing Package 3 5 Summary 28 The operation of the system has now been defined at the component level and at the subsystem level In Chapter 2 the needs of the laboratory were examined to develop an effective data acquisition system At the most basic level functional system elements and system components were defined to answer those needs In this chapter those functional elements were networked together to define subsystems to carry out the tasks noted earlier These subsystems were examined operation by operation In so doing the author has defined the capabilities of the subsystems in contrast to the capabilities of the individual system components Table 3 1 gives an overview of the comparison between the system component capabilities and subsystem capabilities In Chapter 4 the operations of each subsystem will be examined more close
257. s HP DAS will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 257 10 4 2 True Unit Computation Once HP DAS has created a file the program stores a portion of the control file Then the program asks whether or not a device other than a voltage probe is used If so HP DAS asks for the particular conversion process on a given curve Unlike the processes outlined in Chapters 8 and 9 HP DAS will accept processes other then voltage to voltage and current to voltage However the process must be quantity to voltage i e the voltage entry must be the right hand entry As was the case with 7612D and NIC85 HP DAS was written to accept numeric pairs and calculate a conversion coefficient for multiplicative conversion processes Also like NIC85 the operator needs to enter multiplying probes such as a 10x probe 10 4 3 Normal Operations After the voltage conversion process is complete or if there is no voltage conversion process HP DAS sorts the minimum and maximum voltage values out of the data The program uses these values and the final storage time to calculate the x per division and the y per division values for this curve The program stores the remainder of the control register s the x data and the y data If there is another curve HP DAS will accept a new file name and begin the storage routine over again section 10 4 Otherwise the pr
258. s In Chapter 3 the software controlling these components will be examined and their interactivity will be documented CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM INTERACTION 3 1 Introduction In Chapter 2 the author examined the needs of the Solid State Electronics Laboratory In so doing the task of developing a data acquisition and conditioning system was broken into a discrete number of subtasks These subtasks describe the principal functions to be carried out by the system In turn individual pieces of equipment were identified to support these functions In the following chapter the software developed to support and control the prescribed equipment will be examined Selected components were chosen to support various data acquisition data storage data output and data conditioning activities However these components cannot carry out the described activities without interaction with other components Thus within the framework of the system several subsystems exist These subsystems are grouped according to the needs of the particular tasks The subsystem tasks are quite similar to those outlined in Chapter 2 There exist three 3 basic areas of activity 1 data acquisition 2 data output 3 data conditioning Data storage is not a separate function in and of itself This is due to the fact that data storage is an integral portion of all activities Within the area of data acquisition there are four 4 separate areas of interest These areas ar
259. s tablet the software then proceeds with the digitization process by requesting How many curves will be entered 1 2 To this the operator responds 1 P The program then prepares to carry out the digitization process First the boundaries of the trace to be entered have to be defined As pointed out in previous chapters this is done to allow the software to compensate the data for rotational and translational offsets The software requests the boundary inputs Please digitize the corners of the graph grid in the following order upper left upper right lower left and lower right From this information the software calculates the compensating constants for rerotating the plot Next the software asks for the information necessary to scale the newly defined active area to give true units rather than the xy information which the computer actually 48 receives from the graphics tablet How many horizontal divisions are there 10 How many vertical divisions are there 8 What is the value per horizontal division for curve 1 Enter value and unit for example 5ms 5E 3 8 10 ms What is the value per vertical division for curve 1 Enter value and unit for example 5A 5 A 10 V From these inputs the software calculates the values that correspond to the xy positions being digitized These values however will all be positive The values cannot reflect a negative value however without establishing a zero reference There
260. s storage media If more than two 2 channels are monitored the computer will request the operator to input pairs of curves This is done because the mathematical processing program can only process a file with two 2 input curves This data acquisition process is described in more detail in Chapter 4 In section 4 2 1 a sample experiment is performed with the human machine interaction documented This example was designed as a tutorial for use of this program HP DAS including computer prompts and operator responses For further details regarding this program refer to 1 Appendix A Program Listings HP DAS and 2 Appendix C User s Manual Chapter 9 System Multiplexer and Voltmeter Control Package 3 2 2 Intermediate Measurement Subsystem The intermediate measurement subsystem was developed using the HP85 Desktop Computer the HP9895A Flexible Disk the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope Nicolet These units are tied together using the software package named NIC 85 In addition the intermediate measurement subsystem was developed with an option to use the slow measurement subsystem described in section 3 2 1 Figure 3 2 shows the block diagram of the intermediate measurement subsystem The software is groomed to accept four 4 curves with 1024 point per curve The software is a highly modified version of a program purchased from Software Consulting Group as noted in section 2 2 2 This program was primarily fashioned to
261. should keep in mind some of the constraints of the system however First TABLET polls the graphics tablet periodically to see if there has been a digitization The timing of the operation can occasionally lose the digitized point To minimize this problem the program will cause the graphics tablet to respond audibly after each digitizing operation There will occur one 1 beep for a digitized data point or two 2 beeps for a digitized softkey If the operator does not hear a response from the graphics tablet i e tone s then the point or softkey was not digitized In that case redigitize the point or softkey 259 Second only points digitized within the bounded area of the graphics tablet area occupies approximately 90 of the tablet s surface area will be stored as data points Any points outside that area will either be ignored or be interpreted as a softkey active areas above the digitizing platen Third TABLET is developed to correct for rotational orientation errors Therefore the data does not have to be placed so that the borders of the graph are parallel to the boundaries of the graphics tablet Lastly the graphics tablet operates by sensing the pen location on the platen by capacitive means The process accuracy can be affected adversely if the medium on the tablet is electrically conductive Therefore do not use conductive media This includes electrically conductive coatings on photographs and manuscripts and mar
262. ss storage Is there an error No Is 15 error No 63 Yes Notify user of Notify user of duplicate name unusual error you want to Purge duplicate purge file from storage Notify user to enter new file name Turn off error Assign buffer to mass storage file Yes there another Store control curve registers to file Yes Is Store one datum to MUX flag file V I or t set there another de data index an integer multiple of 256 there another Yes Set MUX channel Set voltage range MUX channel Enter voltage Trigger channel Wait 500 342 Enter file name Wait 4500 for auxiliary file Is Notify user file file name Yes too long name is too long No Notify user data storing Create auxiliary file on mass storage 18 Is Notify user Assign buffer to flag set for No data is stored separate mass storage file Store auxiliary file Yes Close buffer lear separate flag Fr3 343 Do you Is want to take No MUX flag Yes Load and run VMAUX more data set Yes No O Load and run Autost Is flag set for repetitions Yes Reset defaults 344 NIC85 The NIC85 program is a highly modified version of a software package purchased from Software Consulting Gro
263. stination Set mass storage unit More than a pair Yes notify user DISP DISP Seperate curves by a comma 1 4 DISP DISP To store single curves enter DISP number twice 1 1 INPUT F G F IP F G IP G IF F gt 0 AND F lt 5 THEN 2400 IF G gt 0 AND G lt 5 THEN 2400 CLEAR BEEP DISP Both numbers must be on the DISP range 1 to 4 Please enter a DISP proper pair WAIT 4500 Q GOTO 2190 I 2 E F GOSUB 3800 Input curve pair Make integers Valid curve F Valid curve G No on either notify user Re enter curve pair t Conversion routine 2420 t 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 2630 2640 2650 2660 2670 2680 2690 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND F G THEN 2190 If same type curves then re enter curve CLEAR BEEP DISP DISP DISP DISP Storing data in x IF F G THEN I 1 H 5 2053 1 ON ERROR GOTO 3050 CREATE X H 8 OFF ERROR ASSIGN 1 TO X PRINT 1 1 I PRINT 1 2 P 3 1 PRINT 1 3 P 3 2 PRINT 1 4 P 1 3 PRINT 1 5 P 2 3 K 6 H F IF H gt 2 THEN H 1 FOR J 1 TO 5 PRINT 1 K P H J K K 1 NEXT J IF F G THEN F G H 2 GOTO 2600 pair 114 Set value for sngl crv Calculate data space Trap data create error Create file space Open file Store Store Store Store Store Store of curves horiz
264. storage process section 8 4 On rare occasion other errors may arise If this occurs 7612D will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 8 4 2 Normal Operations Once 7612D has created a file the program stores the control registers and begins sequentially storing all data If the operator chooses to use the system multiplexer and system voltmeter the program will take data on the various channels once every 256 storage operations This is done because the time necessary to take a measurement with the digitizer is typically short However the time required to store data is relatively long Therefore the auxiliary data taken by the system multiplexer and System voltmeter are acquired during the data storage phase In addition acquiring data from the system multiplexer and the system voltmeter takes about 5 s per datum This delay is to allow the voltage to settle Keep in mind the system multiplexer and system voltmeter are used for slowly changing quantities such as temperature When 7612D finishes the normal data storage process the program proceeds to store the auxiliary data If no auxiliary data was taken 246 the program proceeds with the program wrapup section 8 5 Otherwise 7612D asks for a file name for the auxiliary file 1612 notifies the operator that auxiliary data is storing The program then creates an auxiliary fi
265. t significantly by interfering with the mechanism used in digitization Further discussion of this matter is contained in Appendix C In addition to errors associated with the acquisition process the data stored by this system has uncertainties associated with data processing These uncertainties can be described in terms of accuracy Accuracy is considered to be the difference between the actual value and the estimated value and is expressed either as a magnitude e g 1 V or as a fraction of the full scale magnitude e g 01 Vfg The quantities evaluated during the processing are voltage current power and energy The accuracies for voltage and current are set by the system components used during the data acquisition phase The bit accuracies for the system components were derived in previous sections The accuracy associated with power is derived from the individual accuracies for voltage and current The accuracy associated with the energy calculation is derived from the accuracy of the power calculation and the time resolution capabilities of the particular system component In addition to the evaluation of the mentioned quantities the data processing selects the values at second breakdown for voltage current power and energy These values are then rounded to three 3 significant figures To completely describe the accuracy of the system the system component time resolutions computational algorithms and value selection algo
266. t 0 AND T 2 V 3 gt 0 THEN U2 U2 180 1 nd quadrant correction T 1 IP V1 COS U2 U1 5 Corrected x value T 2 IP V1 SIN U2 U1 5 Corrected y value RETURN REM REM 154 2630 REM STORAGE SUBROUTINE 2640 REM 2650 REM 2660 P I 4 J 1 2670 G P1 2680 CLEAR BEEP Set of pts in curve Set of curves 2690 DISP What name do you want for the 2700 DISP storage file 2710 INPUT X Input file name 2720 IF LEN X lt 10 THEN 2780 Name too long 2730 CLEAR BEEP Yes notify user 2740 DISP Name is too large Please enter 2750 DISP a name with less than 11 2760 DISP letters 2770 WAIT 4500 GOTO 2680 Re enter file name 2780 IF Cl 1 THEN 2860 No Same type 2790 CLEAR BEEP No cont 2800 DISP Where do you want the curves 2810 DISP stored DISK00 DISKO1 TAPE 2820 INPUT Q Set data destination 2830 IF Q TAPE THEN R T 2840 IF Q DISK0O1 THEN R D701 2850 MASS STORAGE IS R Set mass storage unit 2860 IF P 1 5 P 2 5 AND P1 2 THEN GOSUB 4380 Yes If both curves are same type then duplicate file routine 2870 IF C N THEN GOSUB 2140 GOTO 410 If don t want to separate re enter y division amp redigitize 2880 CLEAR BEEP 2890 DISP DISP DISP 2900 DISP Storing data in x 2910 A P 1 4 P 2 4 2920 IF Pl 1 THEN A P 1 4 2930 IF F 2 THEN A P 2 4 2940 B 2 A 5 P1 5 Calculate file space 2950 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 30
267. t Digital Oscilloscope and the HP Graphics Tablet are accurate to at least one 1 part in 1000 In addition the time associated with the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer is accurate to one 1 part in 14 6 million far greater than one 1 part in 1000 Thus the user can be confident that a representation of three 3 significant digits is accurate for these quantities However the accuracies associated with the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer are one 1 part in 128 for voltage and current and one 1 part in 64 for power and energy For voltage and current the values should be represented with two 2 significant digits for the power and energy the values should be represented with one 1 significant digit At present the algorithms in the program controlling the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer do not reflect this inadequacy To account for this the user should reduce the values produced to the noted number of significant digits 2 4 Summary In conclusion every type of analog to digital conversion has associated uncertainties and errors These errors are dependent upon the type of A D conversion which is carried out By examining the particular type of A D conversion one can identify the pertinent errors for a given system component Thereby one can define a measurement which will quantify the associated errors In this manner the accuracy of each of the system components was identified and quantified The HP System Voltmeter
268. tations of the present system Therefore a reader will find the necessity to edit programs in the 5 system or write new pieces of software However the author admonishes the reader to carefully document any changes to the software for the user that will follow Appendix C is a user s manual developed as a separate document for working with the system This appendix includes a description of each of the programs used by the system These descriptions are detailed analyses of the workings of each of the software programs which the system accesses Also the data storage file format is discussed in detail to provide the reader with the knowledge necessary to develop software which can be used in conjunction with the data files which are created by the system The reader also will find a number of appendices attached to the user s manual These appendices include a flow chart for startup of the system a table of the present equipment addresses a listing of the error codes which can be generated by the system and a detailed set of flow charts documenting the logical flow of the system CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 2 1 Introduction In developing an adequate data acquisition and conditioning system for the Solid State Electronics Laboratory the scope of work carried out at the lab was examined From this examination the needs for data acquisition storage and manipulation were defined and solutions instrumented The Solid State
269. the operator to enter any voltage conversion processes such as those discussed in section 9 6 12 2 Data Retrieval When YMAUX is loaded the last regular file name is loaded as well After initializing all the registers the program will ask for the name of the auxiliary file associated with the last regular file The auxiliary file name cannot be longer than six 6 characters If the operator enters too long a name the program will ask the operator to enter a valid name Once VMAUX has received a valid file name the program will ask where the operator stored the data 12 2 1 Read Errors VMAUX will attempt to access the mass storage device to read the file Occasionally an error may arise at this point Typically the problem comes from telling the program to read a file on a mass storage 267 device that does not have mass storage media in it i e no disk or tape The program will notify the operator to choose a new mass storage device and will attempt to access the new mass storage On rare occasions other errors may arise If this occurs VMAUX will notify the operator of an unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code 12 2 2 Normal Read Operations Once YMAUX has accessed the auxiliary file the program will read the date from the regular file and the start time from the auxiliary file Next the program will read the data from the auxiliary file Using the a
270. time Set time date 96 HP DAS The HP DAS program controls the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM These instruments are used to make up to four 4 256 point measurements The operator selects the input channel s voltage range s sampling time and test period The program uses these quantities to acquire data After completion the program generates an alarm to notify the operator The program then stores the curves in pairs These pairs are selected by the operator 97 10 REM 20 REM 30 REM 3497A CONTROLLER 40 REM MAIN PROGRAM 50 REM 60 REM Copyright 6 6 85 70 REM gandalf software inc 80 REM Chuck Graves wizard 90 REM 100 REM 110 COM X 10 120 DIM X 4 256 Y 4 256 P 4 5 C 2 4 7T 2 130 CLEAR BEEP 140 DISP Initializing 150 GOSUB 1390 160 CLEAR BEEP Make file name common Initialize registers 170 DISP How many channels are to be 180 DISP monitored by voltmeter 4 max 190 INPUT Pl Input channels 200 P1 IP P1 Make integer 210 IF P1 gt 0 AND P1 lt 5 THEN 260 channels valid 220 CLEAR BEEP No notify user 230 DISP Please choose a number from 1 240 DISP to 4 250 WAIT 4500 GOTO 160 Re enter channels 260 FOR I 1 TO Pl Yes cont 270 CLEAR BEEP 280 DISP Enter the channel number and the 290 DISP voltage range 300 DISP DISP 1V 1 1V 2 and 10V 3 310 INPUT
271. tional analysis is feasible without tying up the HP85 In conclusion at the time of this system s development the Solid State Electronics Laboratory had the most comprehensive and flexible data acquisition in the Department of Electrical Engineering This system will prove to be of great value to the graduate students in their work However this system is not without flaw The system has room for improvement and the opportunities for improvement should be pursued as vigorously as possible SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY 7612D Programmable Digitizer Operators Instruction Manual Tektronix Inc Beaverton OR 1980 Advanced Programming ROM Owner s Manual HP 83 85 Hewlett Packard Company USA 1981 Hewlett Packard 9111A Graphics Tablet Programming Manual Hewlett Packard Company USA 1982 HP 83 85 Mass Storage ROM Manual Hewlett Packard Company USA 1980 HP 85 Owner s Manual and Programming Guide revision D Hewlett Packard Company USA 1979 Interfacing and Programming Manual HP7470A Graphics Plotter Hewlett Packard Company USA 1982 Nicolet HP85 Interface Software User s Manual revision 2 Software Consulting Group Santa Clara CA Unit Hewlett Packard Company USA 1980 Packard Company USA 1976 Hewlett Operation Manual Series 2090 Digital Oscilloscopes Nicolet Instrument Corporation USA i revision B Hewlett Packard Company USA 1980 83 APPENDIX A PROGRAM LISTINGS 84
272. tions Reset HPIB amp retry Timeout error 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 REM REM REM HP9111A SYSTEM REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ON ERROR GOSUB 1670 CLEAR BEEP A 700 AS disk drive GOSUB 1540 A 706 A HP graphics tablet GOSUB 1540 OFF ERROR CHAIN TABLET D700 ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 1620 IF A 700 THEN 1590 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 ASSIGN 1 TO RETURN OUTPUT A OI ENTER A USING K B RETURN DISP The A is OFF Turn DISP ON the A and press DISP CONTINUE RESET 7 PAUSE GOTO 1480 IF ERRN 131 THEN 1620 RETURN REM REM REM PROCESSING SYSTEM REM SUBROUTINE REM REM ON ERROR GOSUB 1890 91 Trap timeout error Set values for disk Check for device Set values for tablet Check for device Load Tablet prog Set timeout branch Not disk drive Open dummy file Close dummy file Address graphics tablet Accept tablet response Notify user of timeout and ask for t corrective actions Reset HPIB Retry to find subsystem Timeout error Trap timeout error 1760 CLEAR BEEP 1770 A 700 AS disk drive 1780 GOSUB 1800 1790 OFF ERROR CHAIN MATH D700 1800 ON TIMEOUT 7 GOTO 1840 1810 ASSIGN 1 TO LAMB D700 1820 ASSIGN
273. titles At this point the program will ask the operator if second breakdown statistics are desired If not the program returns to the key operations 57 S i kd Statisti PLOT will carry out second breakdown calculations only on processed data files If the file being read is unprocessed the program will notify the user the file is unprocessed and will return to the key operations Otherwise PLOT will proceed to place the plotter into print mode In this mode the plotter functions as a very precise very slow printer The program first searches the voltage curve for the peak voltage This it takes to be the second breakdown voltage The program prints this value with a label to indicate the particular quantity 236 PLOT prints the values for the instantaneous current instantaneous power instantaneous energy and time which correspond to the second breakdown voltage Next PLOT scans through the voltage curve to find the value of voltage closest to 10 of the second breakdown voltage The program prints the time associated with this voltage The program prints the instantaneous voltage instantaneous current instantaneous power and instantaneous energy values which correspond to this time to Finally PLOT calculates the change in time from ty to second breakdown and prints it then the program calculates the change in energy from to to second breakdown and prints it After this operation the program places the plotter b
274. tor the program ascertains whether the devices necessary to carry out the desired function is online and runs the program which performs the desired function After completion each of the programs return to Autost 279 Is date and time No Enter date MMDD set 2 a Notify user of id incorrect entry Enter time HHMMSS Wait 4500 Notify user of incorrect entry 280 Choose desired function Take Plot Graphics data curves Process Plot Ivs V data only Choose equipment Nicolet HP HP 7612D O scope VM Tablet Tektronix Is Notify user disk disk drive drive is OFF on Load and run MATH 281 Is disk drive Notify user disk drive is OFF on Is Notify user plotter plotter is OFF on Load and run PLOT 282 Is Notify user disk disk drive drive is OFF on Notify user plotter is OFF Load and run I V 283 Notify user graphics system is inoperative Wait 4500 284 285 G Load and run 7612D Do you want to use as Yes Set flag for one shot single sweep No Yes Is Do you disk drive Notify user disk want to use the No drive is OFF MUX amp VM on Notify user No single sweep 7612D is OFF flag set 9 L
275. trol register Choose function Plot current vs voltage New set of curves Notify user file has not been processed Wait 4500 Scale plot 322 Is the No first curve a Set flags for first curve voltage curve as voltage curve Set flags for first curve as Current curve Enter title for x axis Wait 4500 Is title too Notify user title long is too long No Enter title for y axis Wait 4500 Is title too Notify user title long is too long 323 Calculate of reads Do you want a grid or Set flag for a graph plotting a grid Calculate plotting position Notify user to load plotter Scan y values for 653 minimum and maximum Scale y div so that curve fills 80 of plot Is y div Yes value lt 1 Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Assign to closest range with first two significant digits of 10 20 25 or 50 Assign proper string prefix Scan x values for minimum and maximum Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units 324 Assign to closest range with first two significant digits of 10 20 25 or 50 Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units x div value lt 1
276. truncating the minimum 1640 PO P 3 2 1650 IF FP C V lt 1 THEN P0 P 3 2 1 Expand plot to include minimum 1660 LOCATE M M H P 3 1 P 3 2 35 N N H 35 P0 P 3 2 Set active plotting area N M are margins H is scale factor 1670 FRAME Q CSIZE H 50 10 22 4 Frame amp set char size 1680 SCALE 0 U P 3 1 IP C V 9 SGN C 1 V IP C V 9 SGN C 1 P0 v Scale active plotting are for values 1690 IF Q GRID THEN 1720 Choose grid 1700 AXES U V 0 0 1 1 5 No plot open graph 1710 GOTO 1730 1720 GRID U V 0 0 1 1 t Yes plot grid 1730 GOSUB 4300 Label axes routine 1740 Q Qi B 1 O 1 168 Set number of read cycles start pen up start read position 1750 IF T 1 AND I 2 THEN Q Q2 Change number of read cycles for unprocessed curve 2 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 FOR J 1 TO Q CLEAR BEEP DISP Reading VALS J GOSUB 2990 NEXT J LORG 6 CSIZE H 100 10 16 5 MOVE 5 U P 3 1 IP C V 9 SGN C 2 V LABEL U U1 DEG LDIR 90 LORG 4 Read amp draw routine Label posn upper center Increase char size Plot time label Setup vertical label MOVE 1 LEN VALS V 1 25 U IP C V 9 SGN C 1 P0 2 V LABEL V V1 LDIR 0 GOSUB 4500 CLEAR BEEP DISP Do
277. ues for time and power t and Pj respectively are zero 0 Therefore the error for the energy calculation reduces to AE tmAP PmAt The worst case error occurs for Pm Pmax tm is the total time represented earlier as ttot This yields a worse case error term AE trotAP PmaxAt Substituting in values for AP AE teotPmax 227 PmaxAt The error term for time At can be represented in terms of the total time trot as kttot Thus the equation becomes AE ttotPmax 217 Pmaxkttot 75 teotPmax 21 k Emax 2172 k The error terms for time are 1 one 1 part in 500 t in ms using the HP System Voltmeter 2 one 1 part in 10000 of t using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope 3 175 ps using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer and 4 one 1 part in 4000 of ttot for a standard oscilloscope trace using the HP Graphics Tablet Expressing these values in terms of the total time tt oz the error terms for time are 1 one 1 part in 500 tg m of ttot using the HP System Voltmeter 2 one 1 part in 10000m of ttot using the Nicolet Digital Oscilloscope 3 one 1 part in 28571m of ttot using the Tektronix Programmable Digitizer and 4 one 1 part in 4000 of ttot for a standard oscilloscope trace using the HP Graphics Tablet for m samples The largest error terms occur for the smallest sample sets For the HP System Voltmeter the user can select the number of samples m Typically more than 100 measur
278. up of Santa Clara California The program controls the Nicolet 2090 III Digital Oscilloscope and if desired the HP3497A Data Acquisition Control Unit DACU and HP3437A Digital Voltmeter DVM The oscilloscope is used to make up to four 4 1024 point measurements The operator takes the measurements using the oscilloscope Once a good measurement is acquired the program stores the curves in pairs These pairs are selected by the operator The DACU and DVM are used to take measurements of slower phenomena They are used to make up to four 4 16 point measurements These instruments are used during the storage cycle of the program This data is stored by the program and later processed using the YMAUX program Notify user Initialize control registers ee entries incorrect Set defaults Are Yes entries Initialize data registers valid Wait 4500 Enter channel and Do you want to use the MUX amp VM voltage range Yes t Set MUX flag SN valid Enter of channels Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect Notify user to take measurement Input normalization factors Notify user program will only process 1024 pts Input normalizations factors there another curve No there too many curves Yes Notify user there are too many curves Re initialize data registers 346 347 Store date amp ti
279. urrent at 2nd breakdown Print instantaneous value of energy at 2nd breakdown Read value of power Assign proper at 2nd breakdown string prefix Round to 3 Is significant digits power value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate round to appropriate Is engineering units engineering units energy value lt 1 Round to 3 significant digits Assign proper Read value of energy string prefix at 2nd breakdown Print instantaneous value of power at 2nd breakdown Print time To for value of voltage at 10 of 2nd breakdown voltage Read value of time Assign proper at 2nd breakdown string prefix Round to 3 Is significant digits time value lt 1 Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Multiply by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units Divide by 1000 to round to appropriate engineering units To value lt 1 Round to 3 significant digits Find time To for value of voltage at 10 of 2nd breakdown voltage Assign proper string prefix Print value of time at 2nd b
280. urve The software then calculates the time integral of the power curve Then these curves current voltage power and energy are stored on the selected media 2 6 Summary The Solid State Electronics Laboratory had specific needs for a data acquisition system This system needed to answer three 3 co equal goals The system needed to be 1 user friendly 2 flexible and 3 efficient and timely To obtain these goals the specific requirements for past present and future work were examined In so doing the author defined the basic capabilities required of an effective data acquisition and conditioning system These capabilities were 1 data acquisition capabilities 2 data storage capabilities 3 hardcopy output capabilities 4 limited computational capabilities The topic of data acquisition capabilities was further defined by examining various time regime requirements These time regimes were Classified as 1 slow measurements 100 milliseconds per sample and greater 2 intermediate measurements 500 nanoseconds to 100 milliseconds per sample 3 fast measurements 5 nanoseconds to 500 14 nanoseconds per sample 4 very fast measurements less than 5 nanoseconds per sample Based upon the classifications and requirements noted a set of equipment was gathered to accomplish the system goals These units were chosen specifically for their capabilities and the manner in which their capabilities fulfilled system requirement
281. urve 1 B of 256 pt blks Ql of reads curve 1 A of pts curve 2 B of 256 pt blks Q2 of reads curve 2 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 194 DISP Initial read and sort FOR J R 1 1 TO R 1 2 READ 1 3 X J R 1 1 1 Read good data curve 1 NEXT J P 3 4 J R 1 1 Set of pts workspace Jl P 3 4 1 J2 R 2 1 Set pts ind start rd FOR J 1 TO P 3 4 FOR L J2 TO R 2 2 J2 L Bootstrap curve 2 ind READ 1 L A Read good data curve 2 IF X J A THEN 830 If data already stored read next piece of data IF X J lt A THEN 840 If data is larger than upper limit increment upper limit X J1 A Store new data J1 J1 1 Increment curve 1 ind NEXT L NEXT J P 3 3 J1 1 Set new of pts IF P 3 3 P 3 4 THEN 920 If no new data then do not sort FOR J 1 TO P 3 3 Yes sort data together FOR L J TO P 3 3 IF X J gt X L THEN A X J X J X L X L A NEXT L NEXT J I2 P 3 3 Set storage index L 15 5 P 3 3 t Calculate file space CLEAR BEEP DISP Creating file space CREATE TEMPX L 8 Create file space OFF ERROR ASSIGNF 2 TO TEMPX Open new file PRINT 2 1 4 Store of curves 1000 PRINT 2 2 P 3 1 Store of horiz div 195 1010 PRINT 2 3 P 3 2 Store of vert div 1020 PRINT 2 4 P 1 3 Store date 103
282. urve given a current curve and a voltage curve These computations are carried out in two 2 steps First the current curve and the voltage curve are interpolated This is done by comparing the two 2 sets of time data to define a common time frame for the two 2 measurements Any readings outside this time frame are thrown out All of the time values within the time frame are combined into a final time set Both curves are then interpolated linearly and evaluated for all times in the final time set EXI HP Interface Bus HPIB HP85 HP9895A Desktop Computer Flexible Disk Drive Figure 3 6 Data Conditioning Subsystem 27 Next the power curve and the energy curve are calculated using the interpolated current and voltage curves The power curve is calculated by taking a product of the current and the voltage at each of the times The energy curve is calculated by taking the time integral of the power curve The integral is calculated using a trapezoidal approximation As can be seen in Figure 3 7 the area associated with a trapezoid is A 5 Xi41 Xi Yi 1 Y4 Yay Ceeeeasoeesseesevoseseseneenssereseensace Xi 1irYi 1 Vy RA Xir Yi Xi Xi 1 Figure 3 7 Trapezoidal Approximation Once the calculations are completed the computer stores the processed data file on the mass storage media for later recall Due to the restricted memory space the program was developed so that all of the x data 2048 point
283. used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions ERRSC can be used to determine the source of the error Refer to the appropriate Interface Programming section to get details on the error and possible corrective actions Error Number 120 121 122 123 NO mEn 124 ISC Error Condition An interface dependent error This error number not currently used An interface dependent error This error number not currently used An interface dependent error This error number not currently used Syntax error A semicolon delimiter was expected in the statement Either the interface select code specified is out of range or there is no interface present set to the specified select code Interface select codes must be in the range of 3 thru 10 Codes 1 CRT and 2 internal printer are allowed for OUTPUT statements only 393 Possible Corrective Action Put the semicolon where it belongs Be sure that the interface select code is within the proper range Pay special attention to variables that are used to hold interface select codes If the interface select code is OK be sure that the interface is plugged
284. ut and ask for DISP CONTINUE corrective actions PAUSE RESET 7 GOTO 2480 Reset HPIB amp retry IF ERRN 131 THEN 2580 Timeout error RETURN REM REM REM TIME AND DATE REM SUBROUTINE REM REM CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the date in a MMDD format DISP DISP For example March 5 is entered DISP 0305 INPUT A Input date string A VAL A 1 2 Month A IF A gt 12 THEN 2840 Month invalid retry 2790 2800 2810 2820 2830 2840 2850 2860 2870 2880 2890 2900 2910 2920 2930 2940 2950 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 3050 IF A gt 7 THEN A A 7 B VAL A 3 4 IF FP A 2 0 AND B lt 32 THEN 2890 If VAL A 1 2 2 AND B lt 30 THEN 2890 IF FP A 2 0 AND B lt 31 THEN 2890 CLEAR BEEP DISP The date you entered cannot be DISP correct Please re enter WAIT 4500 GOTO 2720 CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the time in an HHMMSS DISP format 95 Identify 31 day months Day B 31 day month valid February valid 30 day month valid Re enter date DISP DISP For example 3 a m is entered DISP 030000 INPUT B A VAL B 1 2 B VAL BS 3 4 C VAL BS 5 6 IF A lt 24 AND B lt 60 AND C lt 60 THEN 3040 CLEAR BEEP DISP The time you entered cannot be DISP correct Please re enter WAIT 4500 GOTO 2890 SETTIME A 3600 B 60 C VAL AS RETURN Input time string Hours A Minutes B Seconds C Time valid Re enter
285. uxiliary data VMAUX calculates the number of curves which were stored and the number of data points in each curve These numbers will be stored in the contol registers 12 3 Data Storage YMAUX was developed to store each of the curves separately The curves stored in the auxiliary files cannot be stored in pairs The program will ask for a name under which to store the curve Unlike previous programs however VMAUX will not ask for a mass storage device Instead the program defaults to the mass storage device from which the data was read 12 3 1 Filec ti E VMAUX will attempt to create a file for storage At this point two 2 common errors arise One 1 is a duplicate file error This arises when the program attempts to create a file that already exists on the mass storage device The program will notify the user of the error YMAUX then asks whether or not the operator wishes to purge the existing file Keep in mind that the auxiliary file name has all of the curve data stored in it If the operator chooses the new file name to be the same as the auxiliary file name VMAUX will purge the file Therefore do not ask the program to purge the auxiliary file name unless all of the 268 important curve information has been stored The program does not have the capabilities to restore the data after it has been purged If the operator chooses to purge VMAUX will purge the existing file and create the file for storage Otherwise the
286. wever a program NORML exists to use the device in a more standard mode This program was designed to aid in setting the device for later single shot activities The operator is referred to the device s user s manual for detailed capabilities of the device 7 2 Main Program NORML was designed as an aid to the operator by triggering the device at a rate which simulates more standard scopes The program offers the operator two 2 possible choices of action 1 pause to change settings depress Kl 2 finished depress K2 After displaying this message the program proceeds to arm and trigger the device approximately once every 100 ms NORML will continue sweeping until a key is depressed 1 3 Change Settings If the operator decides to change settings K1 NORML will pause and allow the operator to change any settings on the device Thus the program acts as an aid in finding reasonable settings for the data acquisition process e g triggering voltage per division or sample period When the operator has changed the desired settings on the front panel press CONTINUE to restart the program The operator should repeat this process until finding adequate settings for a single shot test 239 2 4 Quit When the operator is finished K2 NORML will return to Autost The settings will be maintained by the device since the other program 1612D never initializes the Tektronix 7612D 1 5 Reference A complete outline of NORML is give
287. will return to the data storage setup process where the operator is asked to enter curves pairs for storage section 9 5 Otherwise NIC85 proceeds to store the auxiliary data If no auxiliary data was taken the program will return to the main program execution where the operator is asked whether or not to take more data section 9 4 If auxiliary data was taken NIC85 asks for a file name for the auxiliary file The program notifies the operator that auxiliary data is storing once the program receives a valid name NIC85 then attempts to create a file The program is written to trap a duplicate file error The process that was outlined in file creation errors section 9 7 1 is used for the duplicate file error Should another error occur NIC85 will notify the operator of the unusual error and halt the program If this happens refer to Appendix D for an explanation of the error code Once NIC85 has created the file the program will store the auxiliary data This storage operation however does not use the data format used by the rest of the program 253 A different format is used for auxiliary files because of the restricted program space in the computer This made necessary the quicker data storage process To make these auxiliary files readable for normal processing a further program VMAUX is used to change to a standard format 9 8 Program Wrapup Once NIC85 has stored the auxiliary file the program returns to the main prog
288. wo 2 1024 point measurements The operator enters the measurement settings on the front panel of the digitizer The program loads these settings and asks the operator for verification Then the program arms the digitizer for a measurement Once a good measurement is acquired the program stores the data The DACU and DVM are used to take measurements of slower phenomena They are used to make up to four 4 16 point measurements These instruments are used during the storage cycle of the program This data is stored by the program and later processed using the VMAUX program Initialize registers Set default values Enter of curves Wait 4500 Notify user entry incorrect a repetitive set of Set flag for measurements repetitions 331 332 Do you want to use MUX amp VM Is entry Notify user valid entry incorrect Yes 333 Enter channel Wait 4500 and voltage range Are Notify user entries entries incorrect valid Yes Notify user to set zero position Trigger channel Is operator Arm channel finished there another channel No Notify user to F5 enter settings Poll 7612D Turn on interrupt Is interrupt 335 Input all settings Arm channel Turn off interrupt GND inputs from 7612D Trigger channel Decompose the information strings
289. ximum value in curve C minimum value in curve 1510 IF K lt 4 THEN WS CHRS P K 1 5 Set units for V or I 1520 IF K 4 THEN WS W t Set units for power 1530 IF K 5 THEN W J Set units for energy 1540 D V Y0 2 GOSUB 3200 V D C C1 Set values for magnitude division rounding routine processed D unrounded magn div Y0 magnitude scaling indicator V returns as rounded magn div Cl returns as scaled minimum 1550 VIS WS WS s Assign scaled vertical units set units for next pass 167 1560 D P 1 1 X0 2 GOSUB 3200 U D Set values for time division rounding routine processed D unrounded time div x0 time scaling indicator U returns as rounded time div 1570 U1 W GOTO 1630 Assign scaled time units continue with plotting 1580 WS CHRS P IP K 2 5 Cl C Set units for V or I 1590 D P IP K 2 2 Y0 2 GOSUB 3200 V D C C1 Set values for magnitude division rounding routine unprocessed D unrounded magn div Y0 magnitude scaling indicator V returns as rounded magn div Cl returns as scaled minimum 1600 V1S WS WS s Assign scaled vertical units set units for next pass 1610 D P I 1 X0 2 GOSUB 3200 U D Set values for time division rounding routine unprocessed D unrounded time div X0 time scaling indicator U returns as rounded time div 1620 Ul wWS Scaled time units 1630 IF C gt V 10 THEN C V Prevent routine from
290. you want a copy of the DISP second breakdown statistics DISP Y N INPUT QS I time IF Q Y THEN 350 IF T 1 THEN 2000 CLEAR BEEP DISP Data must be processed first WAIT 4500 GOTO 350 CLEAR BEEP DISP Load plotter and press CONTINUE PAUSE PLOTTER IS 705 LOCATE 0 136 0 100 SCALE 0 100 0 100 MOVE 89 4 69 6 PRINTER IS 705 40 t t Plot magn label Reset orientation Time date label routine 2nd prkdn No return to main prog Yes processed No notify user Return to main prog Yes print 224 prkdn char using plotter Move to origin Set line length 169 2080 PRINT DI 0 1 Set plot direction 2090 PRINT vs Set plot speed 2100 PRINT SI 18 26 ter dass 2110 PRINT USING AA LB Place in label mode 2120 A 0 K 2 I 1 2130 IF CHR P 1 5 A THEN K 3 2140 FOR J 56 TO P 1 4 1 2150 READ 1 15 K 1 P 1 4 J B 2160 READ 1 16 K 1 P 1 4 J BO 2170 READ 1 16 J Bl 2180 READ 1 15 J B2 2190 A B0 B B1 B2 Condition for 20d bkdn 2200 IF A lt 100000000 AND B gt 40 THEN I J C 1 B GOTO 2220 If second breakdown occured begin printing info 2210 NEXT J 2220 PRINT The value for instantaneous 2230 PRINT voltage at 2nd breakdown is 2240 WS V D B GOSUB 3290 A D AS WS Set values for rounding routine WS unrounded units B unrounded voltage at 2nd bkdn D returns as rounded voltage at 2nd bkdn AS returns as rounded units
291. ype do not agree READ found a string but required a number 34 No DATA to read READ and DATA expired RESTORE executed with no DATA statement 35 Dimensioned existing variable attempt to dimension a variable that has been previously declared or used Move DIM statement to beginning of program and try again 36 Illegal dimension Illegal dimension in default array declaration Error 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 384 Exror Condition Array dimensions don t agree e g referencing A 2 when A 5 5 is dimensioned or referencing A 0 when OPTION BASE 1 declared Duplicate user defined function Function definition within function definition needs FN END Reference to a nonexistent user defined function Finding FN END with no matching DEF FN Exiting a function that was not entered with a function call after branching to the middle of a multi line function Illegal function parameter function parameter mismatch e g declared as string called as numeric FN user defined function assignment Function assignment does not occur between DEF FN and FN END Recursive user defined function Numeric input wanted Too few inputs Less items were given than requested by an INPUT statement Too many inputs More items were given than requested by an INPUT statement NEXT missing FOR with no matching NEXT FOR missing NEXT with no matching FOR END statement necessary Null data uninitia
292. ystem 190 DISP voltmeter to make additional 200 DISP measurements Y N 210 INPUT V Make aux measurements 220 IF V Y THEN GOSUB 1360 Yes setup aux meas 230 CLEAR BEEP 240 DISP Set up Nicolet and take 250 DISP measurement 260 DISP DISP When you have the curve you 270 DISP wish to store press CONTINUE 280 PAUSE 290 OUTPUT 715 N1 Ask for norm factors 300 GOSUB 1780 Get norms for curve 1 310 FOR I 1 TO 7 320 A 1 2 1 Store norms for curve 1 330 NEXT I 340 Pl A 3 t Set number of curves 350 IF Pl gt 4 THEN 480 Too many curves 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 108 No cont Yes notify user Re initialize cntl reg Start over No more curves Get norms for curve 2 t Store norms for curve 2 No more curves t Get norms for curve 3 t Store norms for curve 3 Get norms for curve 4 Store norms for curve 4 Clear HPIB Set skip count CLEAR BEEP DISP The processing package can DISP handle no more than 1024 data DISP per curve Therefore only 1024 DISP of the data will be used by the DISP processing program This is DISP equivalent to using Q1 to Q4 DISP To view what will be processed DISP turn the MEMORY switch to Q3 DISP DISP To resume restore MEMORY to ALL DISP and press CONTIN
293. ystem needed to have access to old data publications and outside work and very fast transient data The system was designed to address the needs outlined previously as well as the three 3 objectives outlined in Chapter 1 The following text examines in detail the specific needs of the laboratory and the system components which address these needs The discussion is broken into sections concerning 1 data acquisition capabilities 2 data storage capabilities 3 hardcopy output capabilities 4 data conditioning capabilities As noted earlier the laboratory needed a system capable of making measurements with characteristic times of nanoseconds to weeks In order to do this several different data acquisition units were used The needs for the data acquisition equipment were broken into four 4 time regimes The first time regime is defined as slow measurements These measurements involve data taken at intervals of minutes over a period of up to several weeks This type of data acquisition is necessary for the reliability studies described previously where sample component characteristics e g current and voltage are monitored over several days The slow measurements are useful in experiments where component characteristics such as capacitance change over several seconds and are monitored at intervals of a few milliseconds This type of data acquisition is needed in studying trapping levels and recombination times in discrete devices
294. ze time reg 4140 Y I 0 Initialize magn reg 4150 NEXT I 4160 FOR I 1 TO 3 4170 FOR J 1 TO 5 4180 P 1 J 0 Initialize cntl reg 4190 NEXT J 4200 NEXT I l 4210 PLOTTER IS 705 4220 H 875 X0 1 Y0 1 Default scale factors 4230 ON ERROR GOSUB 4270 Trap file error 4240 IF NUM X 2 2 lt 48 OR NUM X 2 2 gt 122 THEN X NULL If name is not alphanumeric default name is NULL 4250 IF X NULL THEN RETURN 4260 RETURN 4270 IF ERRN 7 THEN X NULL File error set default 4280 OFF ERROR 4290 RETURN 4300 REM SUPPLEMENTARY LABEL 4310 4320 4330 4340 4350 4360 4370 4380 4390 4400 4410 4420 4430 4440 4450 4460 4470 4480 4490 4500 4510 4520 4530 4540 4550 4560 4570 4580 4590 4600 4610 4620 AS AS amp REM SUBROUTINE LORG 6 FOR J 0 TO P 3 1 MOVE J U IP C V 9 SGN C 1 25 v LABEL VALS J U NEXT J LORG 8 FOR J 0 TO PO MOVE 25 U IP C V 9 SGN C 1 J V LABEL VALS IP C V 9 SGN C 1 J V NEXT J RETURN REM SINGLE PLOT OPTION CLEAR BEEP DISP Do you want this plot by itself DISP Y N INPUT S IF S Y THEN L 3 RETURN REM LABELING SUBROUTINE CLEAR BEEP DISP Enter the y coordinate for the DISP date and time INPUT A AS VALS P 1 3 177 Label orig upper cnt Plot x axis labels Label orig cnt rt Plot y axis labels Single plot Set plot position Input date time posn AS VALS VAL AS 1 LEN
295. zer Figure 3 3 Fast Measurement Subsystem The software was designed to accept two 2 curves with 1024 points per curve Much like the intermediate measurement subsystem the fast measurement subsystem functions as a transfer network Again the operator enters the settings on the front panel of the 7612D Unlike the intermediate measurement subsystem however once the 7612D is set up the operator notifies the computer to take control From that point forward the computer controls the process The computer arms the 7612D and awaits a sweep Once a sweep is acquired the computer asks if the sweep is to be stored If not the computer returns control to the operator and waits for the operator to acquire a good sweep The data acquired by the computer is a voltage Thus when the data acquisition is completed the computer asks for any conversion factors 22 in the process This is to allow the operator to condition the data to reflect the measurement of interest e g current prior to storage After the conversion factor is entered the computer stores the conditioned data in the chosen mass storage media As mentioned earlier the slow measurement subsystem is also available for use If the slow measurement subsystem is desired it is used during the storage phase of the fast measurement process As the data is being stored the software takes a measurement from the voltmeter This is done once every 256 storage cycles This cycle is b
296. zing GOSUB 750 CLEAR BEEP DISP What is name of the auxiliary DISP voltage file associated with DISP X 2 INPUT Y IF LEN Y gt 0 AND LEN Y lt 11 THEN 260 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Pick a name DISP with less than 11 letters WAIT 4500 GOTO 160 CLEAR BEEP DISP Where is Y stored DISP DISK00 DISKO1 TAPE INPUT Q IF Q TAPE THEN R T IF Q DISKO01 THEN R D701 ON ERROR GOTO 1790 MASS STORAGE IS R OFF ERROR CLEAR BEEP 204 Make file name common Initialization routine Input name of aux file File name too long Yes notify user Re enter aux file name No enter mass storage Input mass storage Trap mass storage error Assign mass storage 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 DISP Reading GOSUB 920 CLEAR BEEP DISP There are P1 curves FOR I 1 TO P1 DISP Enter the name for curve VALS I INPUT Z IF LEN Z gt 0 AND LEN Z lt 11 THEN 490 CLEAR BEEP DISP Name is too large Pick a name DISP with less than 11 letters WAIT 4500 CLEAR BEEP GOTO 410 CLEAR BEEP DISP Storing Z GOSUB 1350 CLEAR BEEP NEXT I DISP Did you store any curves other DISP than X Y N INPUT Q IF Q N THEN 670 CLEAR BEEP DISP What is the name of the sto

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

31295005453542

31295005453542

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents